JP7569911B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine equipped with a design part.

2. Description of the Related Art Gaming machines having design parts are known in the art (see Patent Document 1).
In this gaming machine, a design portion is provided on the front frame 11 so as to surround the glass plate 12 .

JP 2015-58345 A

However, in conventional gaming machines, there is a risk that the visibility of the gaming ball may be reduced.
An object of the present invention is to ensure visibility of the game ball.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to a first invention comprises a front frame having a design portion formed on an upper portion thereof, a gaming ball guide member provided on the front surface of a gaming board , a gaming area formed on the front surface of the gaming board and including a left area and a right area , and a guide passage disposed at the upper portion of the gaming area for guiding a gaming ball launched with strong force from the left area to the right area , wherein the design portion protrudes forward from the front surface of the front frame, the gaming board has an opening, the guide passage has an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface and extends in an arc shape, the gaming ball guide member includes a first gaming ball guide member and a second gaming ball guide member that guide the gaming ball, the first gaming ball guide member and the second gaming ball guide member are disposed adjacent to each other along the periphery of the opening, and the periphery of the opening is arranged so that the gaming ball does not come into contact with the periphery of the opening. a first design part that covers the edge of the opening, a gap is provided between the first game ball guiding member and the second game ball guiding member, and the size of the gap is set so that the game ball cannot contact the peripheral portion of the opening through the gap, and when a line that extends perpendicular to the front surface of the game board and passes through the top of the outer peripheral surface is taken as a reference line, and the rearmost portion on the underside of the design part among the portions where a plumb line can intersect with the reference line is taken as a first design part, and the lowest portion on the underside of the design part among the portions where a plumb line can intersect with the reference line is taken as a second design part, the first design part is located below the reference line and is distanced from the reference line to a diameter of a game ball or less, and the second design part is located below the reference line and is distanced from the reference line to a diameter of a game ball or more.

In the gaming machine according to the first invention, the second design part is disposed below (at a lower position) than the reference line, and in particular, the distance from the reference line to the second design part is set to be equal to or greater than the diameter of the gaming ball, which allows the design part to be made larger in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the distance from the reference line to the first design part is set to be equal to or less than the diameter of the gaming ball, which allows the gaming ball to be seen from the front when the gaming ball rolls along the outer circumferential surface of the guide passage. In this way, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, the visibility of the gaming ball is ensured, which prevents the player from missing the gaming ball and allows the player to play normally. As a result, the game can be played stably.
Here, the design part corresponds to the design part 40 described later. The front frame corresponds to the front frame unit 4 described later. The game board corresponds to the game board 11ab described later. The game ball guide member corresponds to the left structure B1, the right structure B2, the upper structure B3, and the lower structure B4 described later . The game area corresponds to the game area 30 described later. The outer peripheral surface corresponds to the outer peripheral surface ra described later. The inner peripheral surface corresponds to the inner peripheral surface rb described later. The guide passage corresponds to the guide passage r2 described later. The opening corresponds to the opening PH1 described later. The first game ball guide member and the second game ball guide member correspond to two adjacent structures among the left structure B1, the right structure B2, the upper structure B3, and the lower structure B4 described later. The gap corresponds to the gap G1 to G3 described later. The reference line corresponds to the first reference line k1 described later. The first design part corresponds to the first design part d1 described later. The second design portion corresponds to the second design portion d2 described later.

A gaming machine according to a second invention comprises a front frame having a design part formed on an upper part thereof, a gaming area including a left area and a right area formed on the front surface of a gaming board , a guide passage arranged at the upper part of the gaming area for guiding a gaming ball launched with strong force from the left area to the right area , and a launch control means for controlling the launch of the gaming ball in response to a rotation operation of an operating means, the design part protruding forward from the front surface of the front frame, the guide passage having an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface, and extending in an arc shape, the line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface among lines extending perpendicularly to the front surface of the gaming board being a reference line, the rearmost part on the underside of the design part among parts where a vertical line can intersect with the reference line being a first design part, and the lowest part on the underside of the design part among parts where a vertical line can intersect with the reference line being a second design part, the first design part is located below the reference line and the distance from the reference line to the reference line is equal to or less than the diameter of the gaming ball. the second design portion is located below the reference line and is at a distance from the reference line equal to or greater than the diameter of a game ball; the operating means is rotatable within a range from an initial position to a maximum position; when an operating torque required to start rotating the operating means from the initial position is defined as a first operating torque, an operating torque required to rotate the operating means from the initial position to a predetermined reference position is defined as a second operating torque, and an operating torque required to rotate the operating means from the initial position to the maximum position is defined as a third operating torque, the second operating torque is greater than the first operating torque and the third operating torque is greater than the second operating torque and is equal to or less than twice the second operating torque, when the operating means is rotated to the predetermined reference position, a game ball is launched toward the left side area, and when the operating means is rotated to the maximum position, a game ball is launched toward the right side area.

In the gaming machine according to the second invention, the second design part is disposed below (at a lower position) than the reference line, and in particular, the distance from the reference line to the second design part is set to be equal to or greater than the diameter of the gaming ball, which allows the design part to be made larger in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the distance from the reference line to the first design part is set to be equal to or less than the diameter of the gaming ball, which allows the gaming ball to be seen from the front when the gaming ball rolls along the outer circumferential surface of the guide passage. In this way, in the gaming machine according to the second invention, the visibility of the gaming ball is ensured, which prevents the player from missing the gaming ball and allows the player to play normally. As a result, the game can be played stably.
Here, the design part corresponds to the design part 40 described later. The front frame corresponds to the front frame unit 4 described later. The game board corresponds to the game board 11ab described later. The game area corresponds to the game area 30 described later. The outer peripheral surface corresponds to the outer peripheral surface ra described later. The inner peripheral surface corresponds to the inner peripheral surface rb described later. The guide passage corresponds to the guide passage r2 described later. The operation means corresponds to the operation ring 72 described later. The launch control means corresponds to the payout control board 400 described later. The reference line corresponds to the first reference line k1 described later. The first design part corresponds to the first design part d1 described later. The second design part corresponds to the second design part d2 described later. The first operation torque corresponds to the first operation torque described later. The second operation torque corresponds to the second operation torque described later. The third operation torque corresponds to the third operation torque described later. The predetermined reference position corresponds to the left hit reference position described later.

According to the present invention, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. 13 is a view showing the first opening/closing member 80 arranged in a closed position. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the first opening/closing member 80 arranged in the minimum open position. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the first opening/closing member 80 arranged in the maximum open position. FIG. 13 is a view showing the second opening/closing member 90 arranged in the closed position. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the second opening/closing member 90 arranged in the minimum open position. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the second opening/closing member 90 arranged in the maximum open position. FIG. FIG. 2 is an enlarged view showing the firing handle unit. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the firing handle unit with the face cover removed. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing the positional relationship between the operation ring and the front frame unit. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing the positional relationship between the operation ring and the inner frame unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of setting an operation torque according to the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of setting an operation torque according to the second embodiment. A front view of the game board 11. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board 11ab. FIG. 15 is an enlarged view of a portion indicated by an arrow A in FIG. 14 . FIG. 15 is an enlarged view of a portion indicated by an arrow B in FIG. 14 . FIG. 15 is an enlarged view of a portion indicated by an arrow C in FIG. 14 . An enlarged view of the outlet 58 and the first starting port 51. This is an oblique view showing the other winning ports 55a to 55e as viewed from above. This is a perspective view showing the inside of the other winning ports 55a to 55e, the first starting port 51 and the composite winning device 70. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of the outer rail. A diagram showing the arrangement of guide holes gh in the outer rail. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 27 is an enlarged view of FIG. 26. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a firing condition detection circuit and a firing control circuit. FIG. A block diagram showing the configuration of the performance control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a CPU initialization process. 13 is a flowchart showing a main loop process. 13 is a flowchart showing a save process at the time of power interruption. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a dynamic port output process. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance display device output process. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting-related process. 13 is a flowchart showing a switch management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process. This is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for Special Figure 1. This is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for Special Chart 2. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern random number acquisition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special game management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart change waiting process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during special chart change. 13 is a flowchart showing a number-of-times cutoff management process; A flowchart showing processing while a special chart is stopped. A flowchart showing the processing before opening the first large prize opening. A flowchart showing the first large prize opening opening control process. A flowchart showing the first large prize opening closure activation process. A flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the first large prize opening. A flowchart showing the processing before opening the second large prize opening. A flowchart showing the second large prize opening opening control process. A flowchart showing the second large prize opening closure validity process. A flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the second large prize opening. 13 is a flowchart showing special electric service opening/closing switching processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the map. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during normal map changes. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during normal map stop. This is a flowchart showing the processing before opening normal electric devices. 13 is a flowchart showing normal electric utility opening and closing switching processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature release control process. This is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature closure activation process. This is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of normal electric device opening. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance display device control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing an opening command receiving process.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is configured to include an outer frame unit 2, a main frame unit (not shown), and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (outer frame). The outer frame unit 2 (outer frame) is fixed to an island equipment of an amusement facility.
The main body frame unit is configured to include an inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) and a front frame unit 4 (front frame). The main body frame unit (main body frame) is attached to the outer frame unit 2 via a hinge mechanism. The main body frame unit is disposed on the front side of the outer frame unit 2. This allows the main body frame unit to open and close the front side of the outer frame unit 2.
The inner frame unit 3 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is attached to the outer frame unit 2 via a hinge mechanism. The inner frame unit 3 is disposed on the front side of the outer frame unit 2. A game board unit 10 is attached to the inner frame unit 3. This allows the inner frame unit 3 to open and close the front side of the outer frame unit 2.

The front frame unit 4 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (front frame). The front frame unit 4 is attached to the outer frame unit 2 via a hinge mechanism. The front frame unit 4 is disposed on the front side of the inner frame unit 3. This allows the front frame unit 4 to open and close the front side of the inner frame unit 3 (in particular, the front side of the game board unit 10 attached to the inner frame unit 3).
The front frame unit 4 is also configured to include a pair of transparent plates g1 and g2. The pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 are disposed in approximately the center of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) when viewed from the front side. The pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 are disposed parallel to each other along the depth direction. Each of the transparent plates g1 and g2 is formed in a flat plate shape using a transparent material such as resin or glass.
Furthermore, the front frame unit 4 is configured to include a decorative unit DU, a tray unit SU, and a launch handle unit 6. The decorative unit DU, the tray unit SU, and the launch handle unit 6 are attached to the front of the front frame unit 4 (front frame).
In particular, the decorative unit DU and the tray unit SU are removably attached to the front frame unit 4.

(Configuration of decoration unit DU)
Next, the configuration of the decoration unit DU will be described.
The decorative unit DU is arranged to surround the transparent plates g1 and g2. The decorative unit DU includes a design part (decorative part) 40, a speaker 22 (see FIG. 28), and a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 28).
The design portion 40 is disposed around the transparent plates g1 and g2. The design portion 40 is made of a resin material and has a shape that bulges (protrudes) toward the front side. A sound release portion 4c is provided at each corner on the upper side of the design portion 40. Each sound release portion 4c is provided with a plurality of sound release holes that allow the sound output by the speaker 22 to pass through.
The speakers 22 are disposed inside each sound-removing portion 4c. The frame lamp 20 is disposed inside the design portion 40. The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are driven by dynamic lighting control.

(Configuration of the tray unit SU)
Next, the configuration of the tray unit SU will be described.
Fig. 2 is a diagram showing the first opening and closing member 80 arranged in the closed position. Fig. 3 is a diagram showing the first opening and closing member 80 arranged in the minimum open position. Fig. 4 is a diagram showing the first opening and closing member 80 arranged in the maximum open position. Fig. 5 is a diagram showing the second opening and closing member 90 arranged in the closed position. Fig. 6 is a diagram showing the second opening and closing member 90 arranged in the minimum open position. Fig. 7 is a diagram showing the second opening and closing member 90 arranged in the maximum open position.
The tray unit SU is disposed below the transparent plates g1 and g2.
The receiving tray unit SU includes a receiving tray capable of storing game balls (loan balls and prize balls) dispensed by a game ball dispensing device 440 described later. In this embodiment, the receiving tray includes two receiving trays (upper receiving tray 8 and lower receiving tray 9).
Here, if the number of game balls stored in the upper tray 8 has not reached a predetermined number (if the upper tray 8 is not full), the game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 will flow into the upper tray 8, and if the number of game balls stored in the upper tray 8 has reached a predetermined number (if the upper tray 8 is full), the game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 will flow into the lower tray 9.
The upper tray 8 is formed in a dish shape with an open top. The bottom surface of the upper tray 8 extends along the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the upper tray 8 is inclined so that the left side is higher and the right side is lower when viewed from the front side. As a result, the game balls that flow into the upper tray 8 flow down the bottom surface of the upper tray 8 from the left side to the right side. In the following description, when viewed from the front side, the left side of the upper tray 8 is the "upstream side" of the path along which the game balls flow down, and the right side of the upper tray 8 is the "downstream side" of the path along which the game balls flow down. That is, the game balls that flow into the upper tray 8 from the first payout hole 8a described later flow down the bottom surface of the upper tray 8 from the upstream side to the downstream side.
A first dispensing hole 8a and a first discharge hole 8b are provided in the wall surface on the rear side of the upper receiving tray 8.
The first payout hole 8a is provided at the upstream end of the upper tray 8 (the upstream end of the path along which the game balls flow down). The game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 flow into the upper tray 8 from the first payout hole 8a.
The first discharge hole 8b is provided at the downstream end of the upper tray 8 (the downstream end of the path along which the game balls flow down). The game balls stored in the upper tray 8 can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b to the outside of the upper tray 8. Specifically, the first discharge hole 8b is connected to the second payout hole 9a (described later) via a guide path (not shown) provided on the back side of the upper tray 8. As a result, the game balls discharged from the first discharge hole 8b pass through the guide path and flow into the lower tray 9 from the second payout hole 9a. As a result, it is possible to discharge the game balls from the upper tray 8 to the lower tray 9 through the first discharge hole 8b.
In particular, the first discharge hole 8b is configured with a dimension that allows the game balls to pass through (discharge) one by one. In other words, the first discharge hole 8b is configured with a dimension that makes it impossible to pass through (discharge) two or more game balls at the same time. In this embodiment, the inner diameter of the first discharge hole 8b is 14 mm.

2 to 4, a first opening/closing member 80 capable of opening and closing the first discharge hole 8b is provided on the rear side of the upper tray 8. Here, Figs. 2 to 4 show the state of the upper tray 8 as viewed from the rear side (i.e., the state of the first discharge hole 8b as viewed from the rear side).
The first opening/closing member 80 is an opening/closing member that is opened and closed non-electrically (manually) without using an actuator. The first opening/closing member 80 is configured to include a main body portion 81, an opening/closing piece portion 82, and a connecting portion 83.
The main body 81 is formed in a plate shape extending along the left-right direction. The main body 81 is provided with two guide holes 81a aligned along the left-right direction. Each guide hole 81a is a through hole penetrating along the depth direction. Each guide hole 81a is provided to have a predetermined length along the left-right direction. In addition, a mechanical end 8c corresponding to each guide hole 81a is provided on the rear surface of the upper receiving tray 8. Each mechanical end 8c is formed in a cylindrical shape and is provided so as to protrude from the rear surface of the upper receiving tray 8 toward the rear side. Then, the mechanical end 8c corresponding to the guide hole 81a is inserted into each guide hole 81a.
The opening/closing piece 82 is formed in a rod shape extending along the left-right direction. The opening/closing piece 82 is provided so as to protrude rightward from the right end of the main body 81.
The connecting portion 83 is provided so as to protrude leftward from the left end of the main body portion 81. A connecting hole 83a is provided in the connecting portion 83. The connecting hole 83a is a through hole that penetrates in the depth direction. The connecting hole 83a is provided so as to have a predetermined length in the up-down direction. An output shaft 88d, which will be described later, is inserted into the connecting hole 83a.
The first opening/closing member 80 is disposed at a position to the left of the first discharge hole 8b when viewed from the rear side. The first opening/closing member 80 is capable of being displaced in the left-right direction within a range from a closed position (see FIG. 2) to a maximum open position (see FIG. 4).
When the first opening/closing member 80 is disposed in the closed position, the first discharge hole 8b is closed by the opening/closing piece portion 82, and it is not possible for game balls to pass through the first discharge hole 8b.
When the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced from the closed position toward the left (maximum open position), the closure of the first discharge hole 8b by the opening/closing piece 82 is gradually released, and the first discharge hole 8b is gradually opened. At this time, when the first opening/closing member 80 is placed in the minimum open position (see FIG. 3), the opening width of the first discharge hole 8b becomes approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the first discharge hole 8b. Then, when the first opening/closing member 80 is placed in the maximum open position, the entire first discharge hole 8b is opened.
That is, when viewed from the rear side, when the first opening/closing member 80 is positioned to the right (closed position side) of the minimum open position, it is impossible for game balls to pass through the first discharge hole 8b. On the other hand, when viewed from the rear side, when the first opening/closing member 80 is positioned to the left (maximum open position side) of the minimum open position, game balls can pass through the first discharge hole 8b. As a result, by positioning the first opening/closing member 80 at the minimum open position, the opening width of the first discharge hole 8b is ensured to be the minimum opening width that allows game balls to pass (discharge).

A first ball removal button 85 is provided on the side of the upper tray 8. The first ball removal button 85 includes an operating portion 85a and a pushing piece portion 85b.
The operating portion 85a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The pushing piece 85b is formed in a rod shape. The pushing piece 85b is fixed to the bottom surface of the operating portion 85a. In this case, the pushing piece 85b is provided so as to extend downward from the bottom surface of the operating portion 85a.
The first ball removal button 85 is arranged so that the operating portion 85a protrudes upward from the top surface of the tray unit SU. The first ball removal button 85 can be operated by the player. Specifically, the first ball removal button 85 is provided so that it can be displaced in the up-down direction. The player can displace the first ball removal button 85 in the upward direction by pushing the operating portion 85a downward. In particular, the player can displace the lower end of the pushing piece portion 85b downward by pushing the operating portion 85a downward.
The first ball removal button 85 can be displaced (pushed in) in the vertical direction within a range from the initial position (see Figure 2) to the lowest position (see Figure 4).
The first ball removal button 85 is connected to the first opening/closing member 80 via a bell crank (direction changing mechanism) 88. This makes it possible to convert the displacement of the first ball removal button 85 along the up-down direction into the displacement of the first opening/closing member 80 along the left-right direction.
The bell crank 88 includes an input crank arm 88a, an output crank arm 88b, and a rotating shaft 88c. Each of the crank arms 88a, 88b is formed in a rod shape. The bell crank 88 is configured by connecting the input crank arm 88a and the output crank arm 88b in a generally V-shape (boomerang shape). The input crank arm 88a and the output crank arm 88b are connected at a predetermined angle (for example, 90°). In the bell crank 88, the rotating shaft 88c is provided at the connection portion of the input crank arm 88a and the output crank arm 88b.
In particular, in the bell crank 88, the length of the output side crank arm 88b is longer than the length of the input side crank arm 88a, which makes it possible to increase the ratio of the displacement amount (movement amount) of the first opening/closing member 80 to the operation amount of the first ball removal button 85.

The rotation shaft 88c is disposed so as to extend along the depth direction, and the bell crank 88 is configured to be rotatable about the rotation shaft 88c.
The input crank arm 88a is disposed so as to extend generally in the left-right direction, so that as the bell clamp 88 rotates, the position of the tip of the input clamp arm 88a is displaced in the up-down direction.
The output side crank arm 88b is disposed so as to extend substantially in the up-down direction. As a result, the position of the tip of the output side clamp arm 88b is displaced in the left-right direction in response to the rotation of the bell clamp 88. An output shaft 88d is provided at the tip of the output side crank arm 88b. The output shaft 88d is disposed so as to extend in the depth direction.

The lower end of the pushing piece 85b is disposed so as to contact the upper surface of the tip of the input side clamp arm 88a. Also, an output shaft 88d provided at the tip of the output side crank arm 88b is inserted into a connecting hole 83a provided at the left end of the first opening/closing member 80. Furthermore, the first opening/closing member 80 is biased toward the right side (closed position side) by a coil spring sp when viewed from the rear side.
As a result, when the operating portion 85a of the first ball removal button 85 is not operated, the first opening/closing member 80 is placed in the closed position and the first ball removal button 85 is placed in the initial position. Therefore, the game balls cannot pass through the first discharge hole 8b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are not discharged.
In detail, when the operation part 85a of the first ball removal button 85 is not operated, the coil spring sp biases the first opening and closing member 80 toward the right side (closed position side) as viewed from the rear side, and the inner surface of the left side of each guide hole 81a contacts the mechanical end 8c. As a result, each mechanical end 8c restricts (prevents) the displacement (displacement toward the right side) of the first opening and closing member 80, and the position of the first opening and closing member 80 is maintained in the closed position. Also, as the first opening and closing member 80 is biased toward the right side (closed position side) as viewed from the rear side, the tip of the output side crank arm 88b is pulled toward the right side, the bell crank 88 rotates counterclockwise, and the tip of the input side crank arm 88a pushes the pushing piece part 85b upward. As a result, the first ball removal button 85 is positioned in the initial position.

When the operating portion 85a is pressed downward from the state where the first ball removal button 85 is located in the initial position, the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced from the closed position toward the left side (maximum open position side) as viewed from the back side. At this time, the greater the amount of operation (amount of pressing) of the operating portion 85a, the greater the amount of displacement of the first opening/closing member 80, and as a result, the greater the amount of opening (opening width) of the first discharge hole 8b.
In detail, when the operating portion 85a is pushed downward from a state in which the first ball removal button 85 is disposed in the initial position, the lower end of the pushing piece 85b pushes down the tip of the input side crank arm 88a. As a result, when viewed from the rear side, the bell crank 88 rotates clockwise, the tip of the output side crank arm 88b moves toward the left side, and the output shaft 88d provided at the tip of the output side crank arm 88b pulls the first opening/closing member 80 toward the left side (maximum open position side). As a result, the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced from the closed position toward the left side (maximum open position side), and the closure of the first discharge hole 8b by the opening/closing piece 82 is released.
Then, when the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced to the minimum open position by pushing in the operating portion 85a, the game balls can pass through the first discharge hole 8b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are discharged from the first discharge hole 8b. Here, in the following description, the position of the first ball removal button 85 when the first opening/closing member 80 is disposed at the minimum open position is referred to as the "specific position." In other words, when the first ball removal button 85 is disposed at the specific position by pushing in the operating portion 85a, the first opening/closing member 80 is disposed at the minimum open position, the game balls can pass through the first discharge hole 8b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are discharged from the first discharge hole 8b.
As a result, when the first ball removal button 85 is located above the specific position (towards the initial position), the game ball cannot pass through the first discharge hole 8b. On the other hand, when the first ball removal button 85 is located below the specific position (towards the lowest position), the game ball can pass through the first discharge hole 8b. As a result, by placing (pushing in) the first ball removal button 85 at the specific position, the opening width of the first discharge hole 8b is ensured to be the minimum opening width that allows the game ball to pass (discharge).

Furthermore, when the first ball removal button 85 is pushed to the lowest position, the first opening/closing member 80 is placed in the maximum open position. That is, when the first ball removal button 85 is pushed to the lowest position, the right inner surface of each guide hole 81a comes into contact with the mechanical end 8c when viewed from the rear side. As a result, each mechanical end 8c restricts (prevents) the displacement (displacement to the left) of the first opening/closing member 80, and the displacement (displacement to the left) of the first opening/closing member 80 is controlled to the maximum closed position, and accordingly, the displacement (displacement downward) of the first ball removal button 85 is limited to the lowest position.
Then, when the first ball removal button 85 is positioned at the lowest position and the operating portion 85a is stopped being pressed, the first opening/closing member 80 is returned to the closed position due to the deactivation of the coil spring sp, and the first ball removal button 85 is returned to its initial position.
As a result of the above, a player can discharge the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 from the first discharge hole 8b to the lower tray 9 by pressing the first ball removal button 85 (operation portion 85a).

The lower tray 9 is formed in a dish shape with an open top. The bottom surface of the lower tray 9 extends along the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the lower tray 9 is inclined so that the left side is higher and the right side is lower when viewed from the front side. As a result, the game balls that flow into the lower tray 9 flow down the bottom surface of the lower tray 9 from the left side to the right side. In the following description, when viewed from the front side, the left side of the lower tray 9 is the "upstream side" of the path along which the game balls flow down, and the right side of the lower tray 9 is the "downstream side" of the path along which the game balls flow down. That is, the game balls that flow into the lower tray 9 from the second payout hole 9a described later flow down the bottom surface of the lower tray 9 from the upstream side to the downstream side.
A second dispensing hole 9a is provided in the wall surface on the rear side of the lower receiving tray 9. In addition, a second discharge hole 9b is provided in the bottom surface of the lower receiving tray 9.
The second payout hole 9a is provided at the upstream end of the lower tray 9 (the upstream end of the path along which the game balls flow down). The game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 (when the upper tray 8 is full) and the game balls discharged from the first discharge hole 8b flow into the lower tray 9 from the second payout hole 9a.
The second discharge hole 9b is provided at the downstream end of the lower tray 9 (the downstream end of the path along which the game balls flow down). The game balls stored in the lower tray 9 can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b to the outside of the lower tray 9. In this embodiment, the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (specifically, to a coin box placed below the lower tray 9). The game balls stored in the lower tray 9 may be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b to the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, to a counting device that counts the game balls).
In particular, the dimensions of the second discharge hole 9b are larger than the dimensions of the first discharge hole 8b. This allows the second discharge hole 9b to pass more game balls at the same time than the first discharge hole 8b. In other words, the number of game balls that can pass through the second discharge hole 9b at the same time is greater than the number of game balls that can pass through the first discharge hole 8b at the same time. Specifically, the second discharge hole 9b is configured with dimensions that allow two or more balls (five balls in this embodiment) to pass (discharge) at the same time. In this embodiment, the inner diameter of the second discharge hole 9b is 25 mm.

5 to 7, a second opening/closing member 90 capable of opening and closing the second discharge hole 9b is provided on the bottom side of the lower tray 9. Here, Figs. 5 to 7 show the state of the lower tray 9 as viewed from the lower side (bottom side) (i.e., the state of the second discharge hole 8b as viewed from the lower side (bottom side)).
The second opening/closing member 90 is an opening/closing member that is opened and closed non-electrically (manually) without using an actuator. The second opening/closing member 90 is configured to include an opening/closing plate portion 91 formed in a disk shape. The second opening/closing member 90 is capable of being displaced in the left-right direction within a range from a closed position (see FIG. 5) to a maximum open position (see FIG. 7).
When the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed in the closed position, the entire second discharge hole 9b is closed by the opening/closing plate portion 91, making it impossible for game balls to pass through the second discharge hole 9b.
When the second opening/closing member 90 is displaced from the closed position toward the maximum open position, the closing of the second discharge hole 9b by the opening/closing plate portion 91 is gradually released, and the second discharge hole 9b is gradually opened. At this time, when the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the minimum open position (see FIG. 6), the opening width of the second discharge hole 9b becomes approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the second discharge hole 9b. In particular, when the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the minimum open position, it is possible to pass (discharge) the game balls one by one from the second discharge hole 9b. Then, when the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the maximum open position, the entire second discharge hole 9b is opened. In particular, when the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the maximum open position, it is possible to pass (discharge) two or more game balls (five balls in this embodiment) simultaneously from the second discharge hole 9b.
That is, when the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed closer to the closed position than the minimum open position, it is impossible for game balls to pass through the second discharge hole 9b. On the other hand, when the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed closer to the maximum open position than the minimum open position, game balls can pass through the second discharge hole 9b. As a result, by disposing the second opening/closing member 90 at the minimum open position, the opening width of the second discharge hole 9b is ensured to be the minimum opening width that allows game balls to pass through (be discharged).

A second ball removal button 95 is provided on the front side of the lower tray 9. The second ball removal button 95 includes an operating portion 95a formed in a piece shape.
The second ball removal button 95 is positioned so that the operating portion 95a protrudes from the front of the lower tray 9 toward the front side. The second ball removal button 95 can be operated by the player. Specifically, the second ball removal button 95 is provided so that it can be displaced along the depth direction. The player can displace the second ball removal button 95 along the depth direction by pushing the operating portion 95a toward the back side.
The second ball removal button 95 can be displaced (pushed in) in the depth direction within a range from the initial position (see Figure 5) to the lowest position (see Figure 7).

The second ball removal button 95 is connected to the second opening/closing member 90 via a change-direction mechanism (not shown). This makes it possible to convert the displacement of the second ball removal button 95 along the depth direction into the displacement of the second opening/closing member 90 along the left-right direction.
The second opening/closing member 90 is biased toward the right side (closed position side) when viewed from below by a biasing means such as a coil spring (not shown). As a result, when the operating part 95a of the second ball removal button 95 is not operated, the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the closed position and the second ball removal button 95 is placed in the initial position. Therefore, it is impossible for the game balls to pass through the second discharge hole 9b, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 are not discharged.
When the second ball removal button 95 is in the initial position and the operating portion 95a is pushed in toward the back side, the second opening/closing member 90 is displaced from the closed position toward the left side (maximum open position) as viewed from below. At this time, the greater the amount of operation (push amount) of the operating portion 95a, the greater the amount of displacement of the second opening/closing member 90, and as a result, the greater the opening amount (opening width) of the second discharge hole 9b.
Then, when the second opening/closing member 90 is displaced to the minimum open position by pushing in the operating portion 95a, the game balls can pass through the second discharge hole 9b, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 are discharged from the second discharge hole 9b. Here, in the following description, the position of the second ball removal button 95 when the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed at the minimum open position is referred to as the "specific position." In other words, when the second ball removal button 95 is disposed at the specific position by pushing in the operating portion 95a, the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed at the minimum open position, the game balls can pass through the second discharge hole 9b, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 are discharged from the second discharge hole 9b.
As a result, when the second ball removal button 95 is located closer to the specific position (towards the initial position), the game ball cannot pass through the second discharge hole 9b. On the other hand, when the second ball removal button 95 is located further back from the specific position (towards the lowest position), the game ball can pass through the second discharge hole 9b. As a result, by placing (pushing in) the second ball removal button 95 at the specific position, the minimum opening width that allows the game ball to pass (discharge) is secured as the opening width of the second discharge hole 9b.
Furthermore, when the second ball removal button 95 is pushed to the lowest position, the second opening/closing member 90 is positioned at the maximum open position, which opens the entire second discharge hole 9b and allows two or more balls (five balls in this embodiment) to be discharged simultaneously from the second discharge hole 9b.
Then, when the second ball removal button 95 is positioned in the lowest position and the operating portion 95a is stopped being pressed, the disabling means is deactivated, causing the second opening/closing member 90 to return to the closed position and the second ball removal button 95 to return to its initial position.
As a result of the above, by pressing the second ball removal button 95 (operation section 95a), the player can discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 through the second discharge hole 9b to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (specifically, to a dollar box placed below the lower tray 9).

In particular, in this embodiment, the dimensions of the second discharge hole 9b are larger than the dimensions of the first discharge hole 8b. That is, the second discharge hole 9b can simultaneously pass (discharge) more game balls than the first discharge hole 8b. This makes it possible to quickly release the full-tank error when an abnormal state occurs in which the trays (upper tray 8 and lower tray 9) are filled with game balls and the game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 cannot be sent to the trays (hereinafter referred to as a "full-tank error").
In addition, in this embodiment, the first ball removal button 85 can be operated to a state where a game ball can pass through the first discharge hole 8b (a state where a game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b) by an amount of operation that is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (approximately 11 mm).
Specifically, with respect to the first ball removal button 85, an operation amount of 4 mm can bring the first discharge hole 8b into a state in which the game ball can pass through (a state in which the game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
That is, the operation amount for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the specific position is 4 mm. In other words, the first ball removal button 85 can be placed in the specific position by pressing it 4 mm from the initial position.
This makes it possible to eject game balls from the upper tray 8 with a small amount of operation.
In addition, in this embodiment, the second ball removal button 95 can be operated with an amount of operation that is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball to put the game ball into a state where it can pass through the second discharge hole 9b (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b).
In particular, the second ball removal button 95 can be operated to put the second discharge hole 9b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b) with an amount of operation less than the amount of operation of the first ball removal button 85 required to put the game ball in a state where it can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b. In other words, the amount of operation (minimum amount of operation) of the second ball removal button 95 required to put the second discharge hole 9b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b) is smaller than the amount of operation (minimum amount of operation) of the first ball removal button 85 required to put the first discharge hole 8b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
Specifically, with respect to the second ball removal button 95, an operation amount of 3 mm can bring the second discharge hole 9b into a state in which the game ball can pass through (a state in which the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b).
That is, for the second ball removal button 95, the operation amount for displacing it from the initial position to a specific position is 3 mm. In other words, for the second ball removal button 95, it is possible to place it in a specific position by pressing it 3 mm from the initial position. In particular, the "operation amount for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to a specific position" is less than the "operation amount for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to a specific position."
This makes it possible to eject game balls from the lower tray 9 with a small amount of operation. In particular, when a player is required to quickly remove balls from the tray, such as when a full-tank error occurs, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the second ball removal button 95, which enables efficient ball removal.

In this embodiment, the second ball removal button 95 can be operated to put the second discharge hole 9b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b) with a smaller operation load than the operation load of the first ball removal button 85 required to put the game ball in a state where it can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b. In other words, the operation load (minimum operation load) of the second ball removal button 95 required to put the second discharge hole 9b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b) is smaller than the operation load (minimum operation load) of the first ball removal button 85 required to put the first discharge hole 8b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
Specifically, with respect to the first ball removal button 85, an operating load of 4 [N] can be applied to bring the first discharge hole 8b into a state in which a game ball can pass through (a state in which a game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
That is, the operating load required to move the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to a specific position is 4 [N]. In other words, the first ball removal button 85 located at the initial position can be placed at the specific position by pressing it with a force of 4 [N].
On the other hand, with regard to the second ball removal button 95, an operating load of 2 [N] can be applied to bring the second discharge hole 9b into a state in which the game ball can pass through (a state in which the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b).
That is, the operating load required to displace the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to a specific position is 2 [N]. In other words, the second ball removal button 95, which is located at the initial position, can be placed at a specific position by pressing it with a force of 2 [N]. In particular, the "operation load required to displace the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to a specific position" is less than the "operation load required to displace the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to a specific position."
This allows the second ball removal button 95 to be operated with less force than the first ball removal button 85. This makes it possible to encourage the player to operate the second ball removal button 95, which allows efficient ball removal, in cases where a full-tank error occurs or other situations that require balls to be removed quickly from the tray.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum operation amount of the second ball removal button 95 is greater than the maximum operation amount of the first ball removal button 85. That is, the operation amount of the second ball removal button 95 required to open the second discharge hole 9b to the upper limit (maximum) is greater than the operation amount of the first ball removal button 85 required to open the first discharge hole 8b to the upper limit (maximum).
That is, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the lowest position is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball. Specifically, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the lowest position is 6 mm. In other words, the first ball removal button 85 can be placed at the lowest position by pushing it in 6 mm from the initial position.
On the other hand, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to the lowest position is equal to or greater than (exceeds) the diameter of the game ball. Specifically, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to the lowest position is 14.5 [mm]. In other words, the second ball removal button 95 can be placed at the lowest position by pushing it in 14.5 [mm] from the initial position. In particular, the "operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to the lowest position" is greater than the "operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the lowest position."
As a result, of the two ball removal buttons (the first ball removal button 85 and the second ball removal button 95), the ball removal button with the largest maximum operation amount (the second ball removal button 95) becomes the ball removal button with the highest ball removal efficiency. Therefore, when a full-tank error occurs or other situations that require quick ball removal from the tray, the player can intuitively select ball removal using the second ball removal button 95.

The tray unit SU is also configured to include various operating means that can be operated by the player.
In this embodiment, various operating means include a performance button 5b, a rotary selector 5c, a light intensity adjustment button (not shown), a volume adjustment button (not shown), a cross key button (not shown), etc.
The effect button 5b includes an operation part that can be pressed by the player, and a button switch 25 (see FIG. 28) that detects the pressing of the operation part. The button switch 25 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 28) every time the operation part is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") includes an operating section that can be rotated by the player, and a dial switch 26 (see FIG. 28) that detects the rotation of the operating section. The dial switch 26 outputs a detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the operating section is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60°).

The light intensity adjustment button includes two operation parts (a first operation part and a second operation part) that can be pressed by the player, and a light intensity adjustment switch 27 (see FIG. 28) that detects the pressing of each operation part. The light intensity adjustment switch 27 outputs a first detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the first operation part is pressed, and outputs a second detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the second operation part is pressed.
The volume adjustment button includes two operation parts (a first operation part and a second operation part) that can be pressed by the player, and a volume adjustment switch 28 (see FIG. 28) that detects the pressing of each operation part. The volume adjustment switch 28 outputs a first detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the first operation part is pressed, and outputs a second detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the second operation part is pressed.
The cross key button includes four operation parts (up button, down button, left button, and right button) that can be pressed by the player, and a cross key switch 29 (see FIG. 28) that detects the pressing of each operation part. The cross key switch 29 outputs a first detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the up button is pressed, outputs a second detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the down button is pressed, outputs a third detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the left button is pressed, and outputs a fourth detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the right button is pressed.

Further, a loan operation unit 7 is disposed on the upper surface of the tray unit SU. The loan operation unit 7 has a ball loan button 7a, a return button 7b, and a degree display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicatively connected to a CR unit 700 that can read and update information recorded on a prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 700, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 700 is displayed on the point display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the ball loan button 7a is operated while the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit 700, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out into the upper tray 8. At this time, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded in the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the updated remaining number of points of the valuable medium is displayed on the point display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the return button 7b is operated while a prepaid card with remaining points of valuable media is inserted in the CR unit 700, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 700.
Here, the prepaid card may be, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, or the like.

(Configuration of Launch Handle Unit 6)
Next, the configuration of the firing handle unit 6 will be described.
Figure 8 is an enlarged view of the firing handle unit.Figure 9 is a perspective view of the firing handle unit with the face cover removed.
Here, FIG. 8A shows a state in which an operation ring 72, which will be described later, is located at an initial position, and FIG. 8B shows a state in which the operation ring 72 is located at a maximum position.
The launch handle unit 6 is provided on the main body frame. Specifically, the launch handle unit 6 is provided so as to protrude from the front of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side. The launch handle unit 6 is disposed to the side of the receiving tray unit SU.
As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 , the firing handle unit 6 includes a handle base 71 , an operating ring 72 , a coil spring 73 , a face cover 74 , and a firing stop button 77 .

The handle base 71 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and is fixed to the front surface of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). The handle base 71 is provided with a rotating shaft 71a and three guide shafts 71b. The rotating shaft 71a is provided along the central axis of the handle base 71, which is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The three guide shafts 71b are provided around the rotating shaft 71a.
The operation ring 72 is rotatably attached to the handle base 71. The operation ring 72 includes a ring portion 72a and a plurality of finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc (three in this embodiment) provided on the outer circumferential surface of the ring portion 72a.
The ring portion 72a is formed in a generally cylindrical shape (generally annular or ring-shaped) with an open top surface and a bottom surface.
Each of the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc is provided so as to protrude outward from the outer circumferential surface of the ring portion 72a. The three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc are provided at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction of the ring portion 72a. The three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc have different sizes. In particular, the three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc have different protruding amounts (hereinafter simply referred to as "protruding amounts") from the outer circumferential surface of the ring portion 72a. That is, the protruding amounts are the dimensions (heights) from the outer circumferential surface of the ring portion 72a to the apexes (radial apexes) of the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc.

In this embodiment, of the three finger hook portions fa, fb, fc lined up in the left-right direction when the operating ring 72 is placed in the initial position, the finger hook portion fa on the left side has the greatest protrusion amount, the finger hook portion fc on the right side has the smallest protrusion amount, and the finger hook portion fb in the middle has an amount of protrusion smaller than that of finger hook portion fa but larger than that of finger hook portion fc.
In other words, of the three finger hook portions fa, fb, fc lined up in the vertical direction when the operating ring 72 is positioned at the maximum position, the finger hook portion fa located on the upper side has the greatest protrusion amount, the finger hook portion fc located on the lower side has the smallest protrusion amount, and the finger hook portion fb located in the middle has an amount of protrusion smaller than that of finger hook portion fa and larger than that of finger hook portion fc.
That is, the protrusion amounts of the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc are, in order from largest to smallest, finger hook fa, finger hook fb, and finger hook fc (large protrusion amount → small protrusion amount).

A bearing hole (not shown) and a pair of guide holes 72b are provided in the bottom surface of the ring portion 72a. The bearing hole is provided along the central axis of the ring portion 72a, which is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. Each guide hole 72b is an elongated through hole curved in the circumferential direction. The pair of guide holes 72b are arranged around the bearing hole with a phase shift of 180 degrees.
One end of the coil spring 73 is engaged with a receiving portion (not shown) of the handle base 71, and the other end is engaged with a receiving portion (not shown) of the operation ring 72. The coil spring 73 biases the operation ring 72 toward the initial position.
The face cover 74 is formed in a substantially hemispherical shape. The face cover 74 is attached to the tip of each guide shaft 71b by screwing. As a result, the operation ring 72 is rotatably held in the area between the handle base 71 and the face cover 74. The face cover 74 covers (conceals) the top surface side of the open ring portion 72a.
The firing stop button 77 is provided on the outer circumferential surface of the handle base 71. The firing stop button 77 can be pressed by the player.

The operation ring 72 is attached to the handle base 71 with the rotating shaft 71a inserted into the bearing hole and the guide shaft 71b inserted into the guide hole 72b. This allows the operation ring 72 to rotate freely around the rotating shaft 71a relative to the handle base 71. At this time, the rotation range of the operation ring 72 is restricted by the guide shaft 71b inserted into the guide hole 72b.
That is, as described above, the operation ring 72 is always biased in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front side by the elastic force of the coil spring 73. Therefore, when the operation ring 72 is not rotated, one end face of each guide hole 72b contacts the guide shaft 71b. This restricts the rotation of the operation ring 72 in the counterclockwise direction, and the operation ring 72 is placed (stationary) in the initial position.
On the other hand, the operation ring 72 can be rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side by rotating it against the biasing force (elastic force) of the coil spring 73. When the amount of clockwise rotation of the operation ring 72 reaches a predetermined amount, the other end face of each guide hole 72b comes into contact with the guide shaft 71b. This restricts the clockwise rotation of the operation ring 72, and the operation ring 72 is positioned (stationary) at the maximum position.
On the other hand, when the rotation of the operation ring 72 is completed (stopped), the bias (elastic force) of the coil spring 73 returns the operation ring 72 to its initial position.
As described above, the player can rotate the operation ring 72. At this time, the player can easily rotate the operation ring 72 by placing his/her fingers on each of the finger rests fa, fb, and fc.
In particular, the operation ring 72 can be rotated (displaced and operated) within a range from an initial position (see FIG. 8A) to a maximum position (see FIG. 8B).
As described below, the game area 30 is configured with a left-side path (left-hand hitting area) formed on the left side of the image display device 31 and a right-side path (right-hand hitting area) formed on the right side of the image display device 31 as paths along which game balls flow.
Then, the game ball launched by the game ball launcher 430 in response to the rotation operation of the operation ring 72 passes through a launch passage (not shown) and flows into the game area 30. At this time, if the momentum of the launched game ball is weak, the game ball that has passed through the launch passage flows into the left path. On the other hand, if the momentum of the launched game ball is strong, the game ball that has passed through the launch passage passes through a guide passage (not shown) and flows into the right path.

The firing handle unit 6 includes a firing volume 411 (see FIG. 28), a touch sensor 412 (see FIG. 28), and a firing stop switch 413 (see FIG. 28).
The firing volume 411 is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 411 detects the rotational operation amount of the operation ring 72 (the angle at which the operation ring 72 is rotated). Specifically, the firing volume 411 includes a rotation shaft (not shown) and a resistor (not shown) whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation shaft. The rotation shaft of the firing volume 411 is fixed coaxially to the bearing hole of the operation ring 72. As a result, the rotation shaft of the firing volume 411 is rotated depending on the rotational operation amount of the operation ring 72, and the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes depending on the rotational operation amount of the operation ring 72.
The firing volume 411 is electrically connected to the operation detection unit 421 (see FIG. 29 ). The operation detection unit 421 detects the rotation operation (amount of rotation operation) of the operation ring 72 based on a change in the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411.

The touch sensor 412 detects the touch (grasping) of the operation ring 72 by the player based on the change in capacitance. When the touch sensor 412 detects the touch of the player to the operation ring 72, it outputs a touch signal to the firing condition detection unit 422 (see FIG. 29) (the touch signal is at a high level). On the other hand, when the touch sensor 412 does not detect the touch of the player to the operation ring 72, it stops outputting the touch signal to the firing condition detection unit 422 (the touch signal is at a low level).
The firing stop switch 413 detects the pressing of the firing stop button 77. When the firing stop switch 413 does not detect the pressing of the firing stop button 77, it outputs a firing stop signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (sets the firing stop signal to a high level). On the other hand, when the firing stop switch 413 detects the pressing of the firing stop button 77, it stops outputting the firing stop signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (sets the firing stop signal to a low level).

(Positional Relationship Between Operation Ring 72 and Main Body Frame)
Next, the positional relationship between the operation ring 72 and the main body frame will be described.
Fig. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the operation ring and the front frame unit, and Fig. 11 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the operation ring and the inner frame unit.
In this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is disposed in the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the main body frame. That is, as shown in Fig. 10, when the operation ring 72 is disposed in the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, as shown in Fig. 11, when the operation ring 72 is disposed in the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the main body frame. That is, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).
This means that even if the main body frame is placed on a floor or the like, the finger grips fa, fb, fc will not come into contact with the floor or the like, making it possible to prevent damage to the launch handle unit 6 (operation ring 72).
In particular, in this embodiment, even when the operation ring 72 is positioned (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, each finger hook portion fa, fb, fc (top) does not protrude downward from the lower edge of the main body frame. That is, even when the operation ring 72 is positioned (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, each finger hook portion fa, fb, fc (top) does not protrude downward from the lower edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, even when the operation ring 72 is positioned (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, each finger hook portion fa, fb, fc (top) does not protrude downward from the lower edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).
This makes it possible to more reliably prevent damage to the launch handle unit 6 (operation ring 72).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is disposed in the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the main body frame. That is, as shown in Fig. 10, when the operation ring 72 is disposed in the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, as shown in Fig. 11, when the operation ring 72 is disposed in the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the main body frame. That is, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).
This makes it possible to prevent damage to the launch handle unit 6 (operating ring 72) even if the main body frame is accidentally hit against a wall or the like, without causing the finger grip portions fa, fb, fc to come into contact with the wall or the like.
In particular, in this embodiment, even when the operation ring 72 is positioned (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, each finger hook portion fa, fb, fc (top) does not protrude to the right from the right edge of the main body frame. That is, even when the operation ring 72 is positioned (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, each finger hook portion fa, fb, fc (top) does not protrude to the right from the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, even when the operation ring 72 is positioned (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, each finger hook portion fa, fb, fc (top) does not protrude to the right from the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).
This makes it possible to more reliably prevent damage to the launch handle unit 6 (operation ring 72).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, of the three finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc, the finger hook portion fa, which has the greatest protrusion amount, is configured not to be located at the lowest point in the rotational trajectory of the finger hook portion fa when the operating ring 72 is positioned at the maximum position.
Here, the "rotational trajectory of the finger grip portion fa" refers to the trajectory that the finger grip portion fa follows when the operation ring 72 rotates within a range from the initial position to the maximum position.
In this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the initial position, the finger hook fa is disposed at the lowest point of the rotation trajectory of the finger hook fa, and when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hook fa is disposed at a position higher than the lowest point of the rotation trajectory of the finger hook fa.
This makes it easier for the player to place his/her finger on the finger grip portion fa, and as a result, the player can easily rotate the operation ring 72.

10 and 11, the dimension (distance) D1 from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the apex of the finger hook portion fa is set to 53.4 mm. The dimension (distance) D2 from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the apex of the finger hook portion fb is set to 45.6 mm. The dimension (distance) D3 from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the apex of the finger hook portion fc is set to 39.3 mm. The dimension (distance) E from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the edge (radial end) of the ring portion 72a is set to 34.6 mm.
In particular, the dimension (distance) F from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the lower edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) is set to 40.0 mm. Also, the dimension (distance) G from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) is set to 49.1 mm.
As a result, dimension D3<dimension F<dimension G, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fc does not protrude outward from the edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, dimension D2<dimension G, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fb does not protrude outward from the edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame).
Furthermore, the dimension (distance) H from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the lower edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) is set to 45.0 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) I from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) is set to 51.1 [mm].
As a result, dimension D3<dimension H<dimension I, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fc does not protrude outward from the edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). Also, dimension D2<dimension I, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fb does not protrude outward from the edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).

(Operation Torque of Operation Ring 72)
Next, the operating torque of the operating ring 72 will be described.
Fig. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting an operation torque according to the first embodiment. Fig. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting an operation torque according to the second embodiment.
In the following description, the operation torque required for the operation ring 72 to start rotating from the initial position is referred to as the "first operation torque." In other words, the first operation torque is the operation torque required for the operation ring 72 disposed at the initial position to start moving. Therefore, when the operation torque acting on the operation ring 72 disposed at the initial position (operation torque toward the maximum position) reaches the first operation torque, the operation ring 72 starts rotating toward the maximum position.
The operation torque required to rotate the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the left-hand hit reference position is referred to as the "second operation torque." In other words, the second operation torque is the operation torque required to displace the operation ring 72 located at the initial position to the left-hand hit reference position. Therefore, when the second operation torque (operation torque toward the maximum position) acts on the operation ring 72 located at the initial position, the operation ring 72 rotates from the initial position to the left-hand hit reference position.
Here, the "left hit reference position" is the position of the operation ring 72 that allows the game ball to be launched to the left path, which will be described later. In particular, the left hit reference position is the position of the operation ring 72 that allows the game ball to be stably launched to the left path. In this embodiment, the center (central) position (angle) of the range (angle) of the operation ring 72 where the game ball will be launched to the left path is specified as the left hit reference position.

The operation torque required to rotate the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the maximum position is referred to as the "third operation torque." In other words, the third operation torque is the operation torque required to displace the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position to the maximum position. Therefore, when the third operation torque (operation torque toward the maximum position) acts on the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position, the operation ring 72 rotates from the initial position to the maximum position.
In this embodiment, the maximum rotation position and the right-hand hit reference position coincide with each other. The "right-hand hit reference position" is a position of the operation ring 72 that allows the game ball to be launched to the right-hand path described later. In particular, the right-hand hit reference position is a position of the operation ring 72 that allows the game ball to be stably launched to the right-hand path.
In addition, the maximum rotation position and the right-hit reference position may not coincide with each other. In other words, the right-hit reference position may be set to the center (center) position (angle) of the range (angle) of the operation ring 72 where the game ball is launched to the right path.

In the present embodiment, the second operating torque is greater than the first operating torque. Also, the third operating torque is greater than the second operating torque. In particular, the third operating torque is equal to or less than twice the second operating torque.
This reduces the difference between the second and third operation torques, and the operation torque when the operation ring 72 is rotated from the left-hand hit reference position to the maximum position (right-hand hit reference position) does not increase suddenly compared to the operation torque when the operation ring 72 is rotated from the initial position to the left-hand hit reference position. Therefore, fatigue of the player caused by operating the operation ring 72 is suppressed, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
In the present embodiment, the second operating torque is equal to or less than twice the first operating torque.
This reduces the difference between the first and second operation torques, and prevents a sudden increase in the operation torque required to rotate the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the left-hit reference position, compared to the operation torque required to start moving the operation ring 72 from the initial position. This reduces the fatigue of the player caused by operating the operation ring 72, and reduces the burden on the player.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the first embodiment, the first operating torque is 6.8 [N·mm], the second operating torque is 13.6 [N·mm], and the third operating torque is 23.8 [N·mm].
Also, as shown in FIG. 13, in the second embodiment, the first operating torque is 27.2 [N·mm], the second operating torque is 54.4 [N·mm], and the third operating torque is 95.2 [N·mm].
On the other hand, in the comparative example, the first operating torque is 31.0 [N·mm], the second operating torque is 69.0 [N·mm], and the third operating torque is 152.0 [N·mm].
As a result, in Examples 1 and 2, compared to the comparative example, it is possible to make the operating torque curve (a curve showing the relationship between operating torque and position) flatter, and when rotating the operating ring 72 from the initial position to the maximum position, there is no sudden increase in operating torque, making it possible to reduce the burden on the player.
In particular, in Example 1, compared to Example 2, the change in operating torque is smaller when rotating the operating ring 72 from the initial position to the maximum position, making it possible to further reduce the burden on the player.

(Rotation angle of operation ring 72)
Next, the rotation angle of the operation ring 72 will be described.
In the following description, the operation angle (rotation angle) of the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the left-handed reference position is referred to as the "first operation angle." In other words, when the operation ring 72 located in the initial position is rotated by the first operation angle (rotation toward the maximum position), the operation ring 72 is located at the left-handed reference position.
The operation angle (rotation angle) of the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the maximum position is defined as a “second operation angle.” In other words, when the operation ring 72 located in the initial position is rotated by the second operation angle (rotation toward the maximum position), the operation ring 72 is located at the maximum position.
In this embodiment, the first operation angle is in the range of 45° to 60°, and the second operation angle is in the range of 100° to 120°. In particular, the first operation angle is equal to or less than half of the second operation angle.
This makes it easier for the player to launch the game ball towards the right-side path.

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a front view of the game board 11. FIG. 15 is a front view of the game board 11ab. FIG. 16 is an enlarged view of the part indicated by the arrow A in FIG. 14. FIG. 17 is an enlarged view of the part indicated by the arrow B in FIG. 14. FIG. 18 is an enlarged view of the part indicated by the arrow C in FIG. 14. FIG. 19 is an enlarged view of the outlet 58 and the first starting hole 51. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the other winning holes 55a to 55e as viewed from above. FIG. 21 is a see-through view showing the inside of the other winning holes 55a to 55e, the first starting hole 51 and the combined winning device 70.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. As a result, the game board unit 10 is disposed on the rear side of the front frame unit 4. The player can view the game board 11 (play area 30) described later through the transparent plates g1 and g2. In this embodiment, the game area 30 described later is configured between the rear side of the transparent plate g2 disposed on the rear side of the pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 and the front side of the game board 11.
The game board unit 10 comprises a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various presentation devices (image display device 31, movable body unit, etc.) attached to the set board.
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side, and an opening formed as a through hole is provided in the approximate center of the rear plate of the set plate.

The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set plate.
As shown in FIG. 14, the game board 11 includes a game board 11ab and various components attached to the game board 11ab.
The game board 11ab is composed of a base plate 11a and a cell sheet 11b (design layer) attached to the front surface (front face) of the base plate 11a. As a result, the front face of the game board 11ab is decorated with the cell sheet 11b.
The substrate 11a is formed in a flat plate shape using acrylic resin, plywood, veneer, or the like.
The cell sheet (design sheet/decorative sheet) 11b is arranged to decorate (impart design) the front surface of the substrate 11a. The cell sheet 11b is made of a cellulose-based resin or the like in a film (sheet) shape. A design (picture) is applied to the front surface of the cell sheet 11b by silk printing.
In this embodiment, various components are attached to the front (front face) of the game board 11ab, such as a windmill W, nails (not shown), inner rail 12, rail base 13, outer rail 14, left structure B1, right structure B2, upper structure B3, lower structure B4, fourth pattern display device 61, other winning hole structure B5, starting hole structure B6, and composite winning device 70. The various components are attached (placed) on the front side (front face) of the cell sheet 11b in the game board 11ab.

(Manufacturing process of the game board 11)
Here, the manufacturing process of the game board 11 will be described.
In the manufacturing process of the game board 11, first, a rectangular substrate 11a in a plan view and a cell sheet 11b on which a design is printed are prepared. Next, glue is applied to the front of the substrate 11a. Then, the cell sheet 11b is attached to the front of the substrate 11a by a cell attachment machine. This forms the game board 11ab.
In the manufacturing process of the game board 11, next, various openings (through holes/openings) are formed in the game board 11ab by a drilling machine. In addition, various pilot holes (non-through holes) for arranging nails and windmills W are formed in the front surface (front face) of the game board 11ab by a gauge press machine.
The various openings are through holes (openings) that penetrate the game board 11 (substrate 11a and cell sheet 11b). As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, among the various openings provided on the game board 11ab, the openings (openings) provided in the game area 30 include an opening PH1 for the image display device 31, an opening PH2 for the fourth symbol display device 61, openings PH3 to PH6 for the other winning holes 55a to 55e, an opening PH7 for the composite winning device 70, an opening PH8 for the first starting hole 51, an opening PH9 for the out hole 58, and an opening for a screw (not shown).
In this embodiment, various openings (through holes and openings) are formed in the game board 11ab. As a result, various openings (through holes and openings) are formed at the same positions in the cell sheet 11b and the board 11a. Therefore, for each opening, the periphery of the opening in the cell sheet 11b coincides with the periphery of the opening in the board 11a.

The opening PH1 is provided at a position corresponding to the display screen 31a of the image display device 31 disposed on the rear side (back side) of the game board 11ab (set board). This allows the player to view the display screen 31a (various images displayed on the display screen 31a) through the opening PH1 and an opening (not shown) provided in the set board.
The opening PH2 is an opening for placing the fourth pattern display device 61. Specifically, the opening PH2 is an opening for inserting a harness (electric wire) extending from the fourth pattern display device 61.
The opening PH3 is an opening that constitutes the other winning opening 55a. Specifically, the opening PH3 is an opening that allows the game ball that has entered the other winning opening 55a to pass through to the back side of the game board 11 (game board 11ab).
The opening PH4 is an opening that constitutes the other winning holes 55b and 55c. Specifically, the opening PH4 is an opening that allows the game balls that enter the other winning holes 55b and 55c to pass through to the back side of the game board 11 (game board 11ab).

The opening PH5 is an opening that constitutes the other winning opening 55d. Specifically, the opening PH5 is an opening for passing the game ball that has entered the other winning opening 55d to the back side of the game board 11 (game board 11ab).
The opening PH6 is an opening that constitutes the other winning opening 55e. Specifically, the opening PH6 is an opening that allows the game ball that has entered the other winning opening 55e to pass through to the back side of the game board 11 (game board 11ab).
The opening PH7 is an opening for arranging the composite winning device 70. Specifically, the opening PH7 is an opening for inserting harnesses (electric wires) extending from various switches and sensors provided in the composite winning device 70, and for allowing game balls entering various ball entry ports (specifically, the second start port 52, the big winning port 53, the operation port 54, and the other winning port 55f) constituting the composite winning device 70 to pass through to the back side of the game board 11 (base plate 11a).
The opening PH8 is an opening that constitutes the first starting hole 51. Specifically, the opening PH8 is an opening that allows the game ball that has entered the first starting hole 51 to pass through to the back side of the game board 11 (game board 11ab).
The opening PH9 is an opening that constitutes the outlet 58. Specifically, the opening PH9 is an opening that allows the game ball that has entered the outlet 58 to pass through to the back side of the game board 11 (game board 11ab).
The various pilot holes are blind holes that do not penetrate the game board 11ab (they penetrate the cell sheet 11b but do not penetrate the board 11a). The various pilot holes serve as marks for arranging nails and windmills W.

In the manufacturing process of the game board 11, next, nails and windmills W are placed in the pilot holes provided in the front surface (front face) of the game board 11ab using a nail gun.
In the manufacturing process of the game board 11, next, various components (left structure B1, right structure B2, upper structure B3, lower structure B4, fourth pattern display device 61, other winning port structure B5, starting port structure B6, composite winning device 70, inner rail 12, rail base 13, outer rail 14, etc.) are manually attached to the front (front surface) of the game board 11ab.
Through the above steps, the game board 11 is manufactured.

(Regarding prevention of peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab)
Next, the prevention of peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab will be described.
As described above, in the game board 11ab, various openings (specifically, an opening PH1 for the image display device 31, an opening PH2 for the fourth pattern display device 61, openings PH3 to PH6 for the other winning holes 55a to 55e, an opening PH7 for the composite winning device 70, an opening PH8 for the first starting hole 51, an opening PH9 for the outlet 58, an opening for a screw (not shown), etc.) are provided within the game area 30 where the game balls flow down.
Here, when an opening is provided within the game area 30, repeated contact with the edge of the opening in the cell sheet 11b (hereinafter referred to as the "opening edge") by game balls may occur, which may cause the cell sheet 11b to peel off from the game board 11ab (board 11a).
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, 95% or more of all opening edges (specifically, openings PH1 to PH9) provided in the game area 30 are covered by the back surfaces of various components. Here, "covered" refers to a state in which the back surfaces of the components are in contact with and cover (are covered by) the opening edges. This makes it possible to suppress peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab by pressing the opening edges against the back surfaces (rear surfaces) of the components.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, the portions of the opening edges provided within the game area 30 that are not covered by the back surface (rear surface) of the component members are configured so that the game balls cannot come into contact with them, or the weight of the game balls themselves prevents the cell sheet 11b from rolling up.
The configuration implemented in the pachinko machine 1 for preventing the cell sheet 11b from peeling off from the game board 11ab will be described in detail below.

The opening PH1 is provided in the approximate center of the gaming board 11ab in a front view. In the gaming board 11ab, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 is covered by a plurality of components. Specifically, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 is covered by the left structure B1, the right structure B2, the upper structure B3, the lower structure B4, and the composite winning device 70. Note that the entire opening edge of the opening PH1 may be covered by a single component.
The left structure B1, the right structure B2, the upper structure B3, the lower structure B4, and the composite winning device 70 are each components that guide the game ball so that it does not enter the opening PH1. In particular, the left structure B1, the right structure B2, the upper structure B3, and the lower structure B4 are each structures that form a passage (path) through which the game ball flows down (passes). The left structure B1, the right structure B2, the upper structure B3, and the lower structure B4 are each formed of resin.
Specifically, the left structural body B1 includes a back plate b1 and a member (not shown) that constitutes the upstream portion of the left path that is configured in front of the back plate b1 (front surface).
The right structural body B2 includes a back plate b2 and a member (not shown) that constitutes the upstream portion of the right path, which is arranged in front of the back plate b2 (front surface).
The upper structure B3 includes a back plate b3 and a member (not shown) that constitutes a guide passage r2 that is formed on the front (front side) of the back side b3. The guide passage r2 guides the game balls launched from the launch passage r1 to the right path.
The lower structure B4 is configured to include a back plate b4 and a member (not shown) that configures a warp path r3 configured on the front (front surface) of the back plate b4. The warp path r3 is configured to include a ball entrance 56a through which the game ball flowing down the left side path can enter, and a rolling stage 56b that rolls (swings) the game ball that entered from the ball entrance 56a and then discharges it above the first starting hole 51.
The composite winning device 70 is configured to include a back panel (not shown) and members (not shown) that constitute the downstream portion of the right path and various ball entry ports (specifically, the large winning port 53, the second starting port 52, the operating port 54, and the other winning port 55f) that are configured in front of the back panel (front surface) of the back panel. The back panel of the composite winning device 70 is made of resin.

The left structure B1, the right structure B2, the upper structure B3, the lower structure B4, and the composite winning device 70 cover the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 so that the game ball does not contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1.
In other words, the opening edge (front end) of opening PH1 is almost entirely covered by the back panel b1 of the left structure B1, the back panel b2 of the right structure B2, the back panel b3 of the upper structure B3, the back panel b4 of the lower structure B4, and the back panel of the composite winning device 70.
This makes it possible to prevent the opening edge of the opening PH1, which is covered by the back panel b1 of the left structure B1, the back panel b2 of the right structure B2, the back panel b3 of the upper structure B3, the back panel b4 of the lower structure B4, and the back panel of the composite winning device 70, from peeling off from the substrate 11a.
Here, as shown in Fig. 16, the back plate b1 of the left structure B1 and the back plate b3 of the upper structure B3 are arranged at a predetermined distance. That is, the back plate b1 of the left structure B1 and the back plate b3 of the upper structure B3 are arranged via a gap G1. As a result, the portion of the opening edge of the opening PH1 that corresponds to the gap G1 is not covered by a component and is exposed. The gap G1 is structured so that the game ball can flow down and pass through the front side of the gap G1 (the game ball can reach the front side of the gap G1).
However, in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball flowing down the game area 30 cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 through the gap G1. That is, the dimension (spacing) of the gap G1 is designed so that the game ball cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 through the gap G1. Specifically, the spacing (dimension) of the gap G1 is set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. In particular, the spacing (dimension) of the gap G1 is set to be less than the diameter of the body (shaft) of the nail. This makes it possible to absorb the deformation due to thermal expansion of the left structure B1 and the upper structure B3 by the gap G1, while suppressing peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab due to contact of the game ball in the opening edge of the opening PH1 at the portion corresponding to the gap G1.
In this embodiment, a route for the game ball to flow down is formed by various components such as nails so that the game ball does not reach the gap G1.

17, the back plate b3 of the upper structure B3 and the back plate b2 of the right structure B2 are arranged at a predetermined interval. That is, the back plate b3 of the upper structure B3 and the back plate b2 of the right structure B2 are arranged via a gap G2. As a result, the portion of the opening edge of the opening PH1 that corresponds to the gap G2 is not covered by a component and is exposed. The gap G2 is structured so that the game ball can flow down and pass through the front side of the gap G2 (the game ball can reach the front side of the gap G2).
However, in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball flowing down the game area 30 cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 through the gap G2. That is, the dimension (spacing) of the gap G2 is designed so that the game ball cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 through the gap G2. Specifically, the spacing (dimension) of the gap G2 is set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. In particular, the spacing (dimension) of the gap G2 is set to be less than the diameter of the nail body (shaft). This makes it possible to absorb the deformation due to thermal expansion of the upper structure B3 and the right structure B2 by the gap G2, while suppressing peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab due to contact of the game ball in the opening edge of the opening PH1, which corresponds to the gap G2.
In this embodiment, a route for the game ball to flow down is formed by various components such as nails so that the game ball does not reach the gap G2.

As shown in Fig. 18, the back panel b2 of the right structure B2 and the back panel of the composite winning device 70 are arranged at a predetermined distance. That is, the back panel b2 of the right structure B2 and the back panel of the composite winning device 70 are arranged with a gap G3 in between. As a result, the portion of the opening edge of the opening PH1 that corresponds to the gap G3 is not covered by a component and is exposed. The gap G3 is structured so that the game ball can flow down and pass through the front side of the gap G3 (the game ball can reach the front side of the gap G3).
However, in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball flowing down the game area 30 cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 through the gap G3. That is, the dimension (spacing) of the gap G3 is designed so that the game ball cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 through the gap G3. Specifically, the spacing (dimension) of the gap G3 is set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. In particular, the spacing (dimension) of the gap G3 is set to be less than the diameter of the nail body (shaft). This makes it possible to absorb the deformation due to thermal expansion of the right structure B2 and the composite winning device 70 by the gap G3, while suppressing peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab due to contact of the game ball in the opening edge of the opening PH1 corresponding to the gap G3.
In this embodiment, a route for the game ball to flow down is formed by various components such as nails so that the game ball does not reach the gap G3.

In addition, the back plate b2 of the lower structure B4 and the back plate of the composite winning device 70 are arranged at a predetermined interval. That is, the back plate b4 of the lower structure B4 and the back plate of the composite winning device 70 are arranged with a predetermined gap (not shown). As a result, the part of the opening edge of the opening PH1 corresponding to the predetermined gap is not covered by the component and is exposed. However, the predetermined gap is structured so that the game ball does not flow down or pass through the front side of the predetermined gap (the game ball does not reach the front side of the predetermined gap). As a result, it is impossible for the game ball to contact the opening edge of the opening PH1 at the predetermined gap.
Similarly, the back plate b1 of the left structure B1 and the back plate b4 of the lower structure B4 are arranged at a predetermined interval. That is, the back plate b1 of the left structure B1 and the back plate b4 of the lower structure B4 are arranged with a predetermined gap (not shown). As a result, the portion of the opening edge of the opening PH1 that corresponds to the predetermined gap is not covered by the component and is exposed. However, the predetermined gap is structured so that the game ball does not flow down or pass through the front side of the predetermined gap (the game ball does not reach the front side of the predetermined gap). As a result, the game ball cannot contact the opening edge of the opening PH1 at the predetermined gap.
As a result, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 is almost entirely covered with a plurality of components. In particular, the opening edge of the opening PH1 is designed so that the part not covered by the components cannot be contacted by the game ball. This prevents the game ball from contacting the entire opening edge of the opening PH1, making it possible to prevent the cell sheet 11b from peeling off from the game board 11ab.

The fourth pattern display device 61 covers the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH2 so that the game ball does not come into contact with the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH2.
That is, the entire opening edge (front end) of the opening PH2 is covered by the back panel of the fourth symbol display device 61. This prevents the game ball from coming into contact with the entire opening edge of the opening PH2, making it possible to suppress peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab.
The fourth pattern display device 61 is configured to include a back panel (not shown) and a variable display device (dot matrix LED, color bar (full color LED), etc.) arranged on the front side of the back panel. The back panel of the fourth pattern display device 61 is formed from resin. The fourth pattern display device 61 is capable of forming a second performance pattern display area a4 (not shown) in which a second performance pattern z2 (not shown) is displayed by the variable display device.

The other winning hole structure B5 covers a part of the opening edges (front ends) of the openings PH3 to PH6 so that the game balls do not come into contact with the opening edges (front ends) of the openings PH3 to PH6.
That is, a portion of the opening edge (front end) of each of the openings PH3 to PH6 is covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5.
The other winning hole structure B5 is made of resin. As shown in FIG. 20, the other winning hole structure B5 is composed of a back plate b5 and five ball entrance sections 57a to 57e formed on the front side of the back plate b5. Each ball entrance section 57a to 57e is formed in a cup shape (concave shape) that opens upward (including diagonally upward). Each ball entrance section 57a to 57e has an opening (ball entrance port) (not shown) through which the game ball flows. Each ball entrance section 57a to 57e is capable of receiving a game ball flowing downward (including diagonally downward) through the opening. Here, each ball entrance section 57a to 57e is capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the left path.
The ball entrance section 57a guides the game ball that has entered the ball entrance section 57a so that the game ball flows into the opening PH3. That is, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance section 57a passes through the opening PH3 and is guided to the back side (rear side) of the game board 11.
The ball entrance section 57b guides the game ball that has entered the ball entrance section 57b so that the game ball flows into the opening PH4. That is, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance section 57b passes through the opening PH4 and is guided to the back side (rear side) of the game board 11.
The ball entrance section 57c guides the game ball that has entered the ball entrance section 57c so that the game ball flows into the opening PH4. That is, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance section 57c passes through the opening PH4 and is guided to the back side (rear side) of the game board 11.
The ball entry section 57d guides the game ball that has entered the ball entry section 57d so that the game ball flows into the opening PH5. That is, the game ball that has entered the ball entry section 57d passes through the opening PH5 and is guided to the back side (rear side) of the game board 11.
The ball entrance section 57e guides the game ball that has entered the ball entrance section 57e so that the game ball flows into the opening PH6. That is, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance section 57e passes through the opening PH6 and is guided to the back side (rear side) of the game board 11.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, each opening PH3, PH5, PH6 is provided with a covered portion (not shown) covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning hole structure B5, and a non-covered portion (exposed portion) NC that is not covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning hole structure B5. At this time, the non-covered portion NC is set in a portion (predetermined range) of the opening edge of each opening PH3, PH5, PH6 that corresponds to the opening (ball entry hole) of each ball entry portion 57a, 57d, 57e. That is, the non-covered portion NC is set in a predetermined portion (predetermined range) of the opening edge of each opening PH3, PH5, PH6 at the upper portion. In other words, the non-covered portion NC is set in a predetermined upper portion of the opening edge of each opening PH3, PH5, PH6. In particular, the non-covered portion NC is set in a predetermined portion (predetermined range) including the apex of the opening edge of each opening PH3, PH5, PH6. On the other hand, the opening edges of the openings PH3, PH5, and PH6, except for the non-covered portion NC, are all covered portions. In other words, the covered portion is set at a predetermined lower portion of the opening edge of each opening PH3, PH5, and PH6. As a result, the opening edges (front ends) of the openings PH3, PH5, and PH6 that correspond to the openings (ball entry holes) of the ball entry portions 57a, 57d, and 57e are not covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning hole structure B5, and the other portions are covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning hole structure B5. In particular, the opening edges of the openings PH3, PH5, and PH6 are not covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning hole structure B5, and the other portions (covered portions) are covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning hole structure B5, and the upper predetermined portions (non-covered portions NC) are not covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning hole structure B5, and the other portions (covered portions) are covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning hole structure B5.
In this embodiment, the opening PH4 is provided with a covered portion (not shown) covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5, and a non-covered portion (exposed portion) NC that is not covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5. At this time, the non-covered portion NC is set in a portion (predetermined range) of the opening edge of the opening PH4 that corresponds to the opening (ball entry opening). That is, the non-covered portion NC is set in a predetermined portion (predetermined range) of the opening edge of the opening PH4 at the top. Here, the opening PH4 is divided by the other winning opening structure B5 into an opening corresponding to the ball entry portion 57b (the opening constituting the other winning opening 55b) and an opening corresponding to the ball entry portion 57c (the opening constituting the other winning opening 55c). The non-covered portion NC is set in a predetermined portion (predetermined range) including the apex of the opening edge of the opening corresponding to the ball entry portion 57b (the opening constituting the other winning opening 55b) and the opening corresponding to the ball entry portion 57c (the opening constituting the other winning opening 55c). On the other hand, the opening edge of the opening PH4, except for the non-covered portion NC, is entirely covered. As a result, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH4, which corresponds to the openings (ball entry openings) of the ball entry portions 57b and 57c, is not covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5, and the other portion is covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5. In particular, the upper predetermined portion (non-covered portion NC) of the opening edge of the opening PH4 is not covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5, and the other portion (covered portion) is covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5.

As a result of the above, with regard to the opening edge (front end) of each opening PH3 to PH6, the portion (specific upper portion) corresponding to the opening (ball entry port) of each ball entry portion 57a to 57e is not covered by the back panel b5 of the other prize entry port structure B5, and is an exposed uncovered portion NC that can be contacted by a game ball, and the other portion is covered by the back panel b5 of the other prize entry port structure B5, and is a covered portion that cannot be contacted by a game ball.
Here, when only considering the prevention of peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab, it is preferable to configure the opening edge (front end) of each opening PH3 to PH6 to be covered entirely by the back plate b5 of the other winning hole structure B5. However, if the opening edge (front end) of each opening PH3 to PH6 is configured to be covered entirely by the back plate b5 of the other winning hole structure B5, the configuration of the other winning hole structure B5 becomes complicated, and the amount of material (resin in this embodiment) required to configure the other winning hole structure B5 increases, resulting in increased manufacturing costs.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a predetermined portion (uncovered portion NC) of the opening edge (front end) of each of the openings PH3 to PH6 is not covered by the other winning hole structure B5. This simplifies the structure of the other winning hole structure B5 and reduces the amount of material required to construct the other winning hole structure B5, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.
Here, if a specific portion (non-covered portion NC) of the opening edge of each opening PH3 to PH6 is simply configured to be uncovered by another winning opening structure B5, there is a risk that peeling of the cell sheet 11b will occur in that specific portion (non-covered portion NC) due to contact with the game ball.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a non-covered portion NC is provided at the opening edge (front end) of each opening PH3 to PH6 in the portion corresponding to the opening (ball entrance) of each ball entrance portion 57a to 57e. As a result, in the non-covered portion NC, the periphery of the cell sheet 11b extends downward, so that when peeling of the cell sheet 11b occurs, the periphery of the cell sheet 11b rolls up upward. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, each ball entrance portion 57a to 57e formed in the other winning opening structure B5 is configured to open upward and receive game balls that flow down (fall) downward. As a result, in the non-covered portion NC, the periphery (front end) of the cell sheet 11b that is about to roll up is pressed down by the weight of the game balls flowing into each ball entrance portion 57a to 57e, making it possible to suppress peeling of the cell sheet 11b.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, a non-covered portion NC is provided at the upper portion (particularly, a predetermined range including the apex of the opening edge) of each opening PH3 to PH6. As a result, in the non-covered portion NC, the periphery of the cell sheet 11b extends downward, so that when peeling of the cell sheet 11b occurs, the periphery of the cell sheet 11b rolls up upward. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the openings (ball entry ports) of each ball entry portion 57a to 57e configured in the other winning port structure B5 are configured to open upward and receive game balls that flow down (fall) downward. As a result, in the non-covered portion NC, the periphery of the sheet material that tries to roll up is pressed down by the weight of the game balls flowing into each entry portion 57a to 57e, making it possible to suppress peeling of the cell sheet 11b.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs while preventing peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when viewed from the front, the entire opening edge (front end) of each opening PH3 to PH6 is concealed by the front plate (not shown) of the other winning opening structure B5.
This makes it possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance from being marred even if peeling of the cell sheet 11b occurs at the upper portion of the opening edge of each of the openings PH3 to PH6.
In addition, when viewed from the front, the upper portions of the opening edges of the openings PH3 to PH6 may be configured not to be hidden by the front panel of the other winning opening structure B5.

The composite winning device 70 covers the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH7 so that the game ball does not come into contact with the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH7. That is, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH7 is entirely covered by the back panel of the composite winning device 70. This prevents the game ball from coming into contact with the entire opening edge of the opening PH7, making it possible to suppress peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab.
The starting hole structure B6 covers the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH8 so that the game ball does not come into contact with the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH8. That is, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH8 is entirely covered by the back plate 51a of the starting hole structure B6. This prevents the game ball from coming into contact with the entire opening edge of the opening PH8, making it possible to suppress peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab.
The starting hole structure B6 is formed of resin. As shown in FIG. 19, the starting hole structure B6 includes a back plate 51a and a ball entrance section 51b formed on the front side of the back plate 51a. The ball entrance section 51b is formed in a cup shape (concave shape) that opens upward. The ball entrance section 51b is capable of receiving a game ball flowing downward. Here, the game ball flowing down the left path can enter the ball entrance section 51b. The ball entrance section 51b guides the entered game ball to flow into the opening PH8. That is, the game ball that enters the ball entrance section 51b passes through the opening PH8 and is guided to the back side of the game board 11.

The starting hole structure B6 and the inner rail 12 guide the game ball to flow into the opening PH9. The starting hole structure B6 and the inner rail 12 cover the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH9 so that the game ball does not contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH9. That is, the opening edge of the opening PH9 is covered by a plurality of components. Specifically, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH9 is covered almost entirely by the back plate 51a of the starting hole structure B6 and the inner rail 12. As a result, the game ball cannot contact the opening edge of the opening PH9 that is covered by the back plate 51a and the inner rail 12 of the starting hole structure B6, and peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab can be suppressed.
Here, as shown in Fig. 19, the back plate 51a and the inner rail 12 of the starting hole structure B6 are arranged at a predetermined interval. That is, the back plate 51a and the inner rail 12 of the starting hole structure B6 are arranged with two gaps G4 in between. As a result, the portions of the opening edge of the opening PH9 that correspond to each gap G4 are not covered by components and are exposed. Each gap G4 is structured so that the game ball can flow down and pass through the front side of the gap G4 (the game ball can reach the front side of the gap G4).
However, in the pachinko machine 1, the game balls flowing down the game area 30 cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH9 from each gap G4. That is, the dimensions (spacing) of each gap G4 are designed so that the game balls cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH9 at each gap G4. Specifically, the spacing (dimension) of each gap G4 is set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. In particular, the spacing (dimension) of each gap G4 is set to be less than the diameter of the nail's body (shaft). This makes it possible to absorb the deformation due to thermal expansion of the starting hole structure B6 and the inner rail 12 by each gap G4, while suppressing peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab due to contact of the game ball at the opening edge of the opening PH9 corresponding to each gap G4.
As a result, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH9 is almost entirely covered with a plurality of components. In particular, the opening edge of the opening PH9 is designed so that the part not covered by the components cannot be contacted by the game ball. This prevents the game ball from contacting the entire opening edge of the opening PH9, making it possible to prevent the cell sheet 11b from peeling off from the game board 11ab.
Here, the opening edge (front end) of each pilot hole in the cell sheet 11b is configured so that the game ball cannot come into contact with the opening edge (front end) by arranging nails or pinwheels W. Also, the opening edge of the opening for the screw in the cell sheet 11b is configured so that the game ball cannot come into contact with the opening edge by screwing in the screw.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the cell sheet 11b from peeling off from the game board 11ab.

(Regarding the inner rail 12 and the outer rail 14)
Next, the inner rail 12 and the outer rail 14 will be described.
Fig. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the game board. Fig. 23 is a diagram showing the configuration of the outer rail. Fig. 24 is a diagram showing the arrangement of guide holes gh in the outer rail. Fig. 25 is a cross-sectional view of the rail base.
23(a) shows the outer rail 14 as viewed from the side, and FIG. 23(b) shows the outer rail 14 as viewed from the front. Also, FIG. 24 shows the outer rail 14 attached to the game board 11 as viewed from the front. Also, in FIG. 25, the game ball is indicated by the symbol "B".
An inner rail 12, a rail base 13, and an outer rail 14 are attached to the front of the game board 11 (base plate 11a). A game area 30 is defined by the inner rail 12, the outer rail 14, etc.
The inner rail 12 is made of resin or the like. When viewed from the front side, the inner rail 12 is configured in an arc shape. The outer peripheral surface of the inner rail 12 forms an inner guide surface 12a that guides the game ball. A return ball prevention piece 12b is provided at the tip of the inner rail 12. The return ball prevention piece 12b prevents the game ball launched from the launch passage r1 into the game area 30 from returning to the launch passage r1 again.

The rail base 13 is made of resin etc. As shown in Fig. 22, the rail base 13 is provided with a guide surface 13b that supports the outer rail 14. The guide surface 13b extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
At least a portion of the guide surface 13b in the longitudinal direction is inclined toward the rear side (the front side of the game board 11). In this embodiment, substantially the entire longitudinal area of the guide surface 13b is inclined toward the rear side. This allows at least a portion (substantially the entire area in this embodiment) of the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 supported by the guide surface 13b in the longitudinal direction to be inclined toward the rear side (the front side of the game board 11). This makes it difficult for the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430 to flow toward the front side (the transparent plate g2 side), making it possible to suppress contact with the transparent plate g2.
The guide surface 13b is provided with a plurality of protrusions (bosses) pr. Each protrusion pr is formed as a substantially elliptical convex portion and is provided so as to protrude from the guide surface 13b. Each protrusion pr is fitted into a guide hole gh provided in the outer rail 14, and determines the position of the outer rail 14 relative to the rail base 13 (game board 11).
A base end (starting end) of the rail base 13 is provided with a base end support portion (not shown) that supports the base end bent portion 14a provided on the outer rail 14. The base end support portion is configured as a recess into which the base end bent portion 14a can be inserted. In addition, a tip end support portion (not shown) that supports the tip end bent portion 14b provided on the outer rail 14 is provided at a tip end (terminal end) of the rail base 13. The tip end support portion is configured as a recess into which the tip end bent portion 14b can be inserted.
The rail base 13 is also provided with a covering portion 13a that covers (supports) the side surface (front side surface) of the outer rail 14 when viewed from the front side.

The outer rail 14 is made of metal. As shown in Figures 22 and 23, the outer rail 14 is formed in a flat plate shape and extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
A base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 is provided with a base end bent portion 14a. The base end bent portion 14a is formed by bending the base end of the outer rail 14 into a substantially L-shape. A tip end bent portion 14b is provided at the tip end (terminal end) of the outer rail 14. The tip end bent portion 14b is formed by bending the tip end of the outer rail 14 into a substantially U-shape.
The outer circumferential surface of the outer rail 14 formed in an arc shape is supported by the guide surface 13b of the rail base 13. The inner circumferential surface of the outer rail 14 formed in an arc shape constitutes an outer guide surface 14c that guides the game ball.
A plurality of guide holes gh are provided in the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c). Each guide hole gh is a through hole that penetrates the outer rail 14 in the thickness direction. Each guide hole gh is a substantially elliptical through hole into which the protrusion pr can be fitted.
In the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c), guide holes gh are provided at positions corresponding to the protrusions pr provided on the guide surface 13b when the outer rail 14 is supported (attached) on the guide surface 13b. As a result, the guide holes gh and the protrusions pr guide (prescribe) the attachment position of the outer rail 14 relative to the rail base 13 (guide surface 13b), and further guide (prescribe) the attachment position of the outer rail 14 relative to the game board 11.

Next, the arrangement of the guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) will be described.
Here, the arrangement of the multiple guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 and the arrangement of the multiple protrusions pr on the guide surface 13b correspond to each other.
Therefore, the arrangement conditions of the multiple guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 and the arrangement conditions of the multiple protrusions pr on the guide surface 13b are the same.
Therefore, the following describes the arrangement conditions of the multiple guide holes gh in the outer rail 14, and omits the description of the arrangement conditions of the multiple protrusions pr on the guide surface 13b.
The outer rail 14 is attached to the front surface of the game board 11 via the rail base 13. The outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side while attached to the game board 11.
As shown in Figure 24, in the following explanation, when looking at the outer rail 14 attached to the game board 11 from the front side, the uppermost part of the outer rail 14 (upper vertex) will be referred to as the "upper vertex P1", and the leftmost part of the outer rail 14 (left vertex) will be referred to as the "left vertex P2".
The range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the left vertex P2 is defined as the "first range H1," the range from the left vertex P2 to the upper vertex P1 of the outer rail 14 is defined as the "second range H2," and the range from the upper vertex P1 to the tip (end) of the outer rail 14 is defined as the "third range H3."
The range from the left apex P2 to the tip (end) of the outer rail 14 is defined as a "fourth range." That is, the fourth range = the second range H2 + the third range H3.
The range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the upper apex P1 is defined as a "fifth range." That is, the fifth range = the first range H1 + the second range H2.
The range from the base end (starting end) to the middle part of the outer rail 14 is referred to as a "sixth range," and the range from the middle part to the tip (ending end) of the outer rail 14 is referred to as a "seventh range." Here, the "middle part" refers to the middle (center) part of the outer rail 14 in the longitudinal direction.

In this embodiment, the first range H1 has a greater number of guide holes gh than the second range H2, and the second range H2 has a greater number of guide holes gh than the third range H3.
In addition, in this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
In addition, in this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
In addition, in this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
In this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first area H1 is greater than that of the fourth area.
In this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the fifth range H3 is greater than that of the third range H3.
In this embodiment, the sixth area has a greater number of guide holes gh than the seventh area.

Specifically, the first region H1 has three guide holes gh arranged along the longitudinal direction, the second region H2 has two guide holes gh arranged along the longitudinal direction, and the third region H3 has no guide holes gh.
As a result, two guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the fourth region, five guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the fifth region, four guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the sixth region, and one guide hole gh is provided along the longitudinal direction in the seventh region.
In other words, on the outer rail 14, the portion on the base end side (the portion on the game ball launching device 430 side) receives a greater impact from the collision of the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430 than the portion on the tip end side (terminal end side), and the impact on the launch direction of the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430 is greater.
As a result, the base end (the side closest to the game ball launcher 430) of the outer rail 14 requires greater attachment strength and more accurate positioning than the tip end (terminal end).
Therefore, in this embodiment, by increasing the number of guide holes gh provided in the base end side (game ball launching device 430 side) of the outer rail 14, it is possible to prevent positional deviation and vibration in the base end side. In addition, it is possible to stabilize the trajectory of the game ball and execute the game according to the design value. In particular, it is possible to prevent damage and vibration of the outer rail 14 due to the collision of the launched game ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball deviation of the launched game ball due to the damage and vibration, and it is possible to stably send the launched game ball to the board surface of the game board 11. As a result, the irregular movement of the game ball is reduced, and it is possible to execute the game stably.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of guide holes gh provided at the tip (end) side of the outer rail 14, it is possible to facilitate processing of the outer rail 14 and attachment to the rail base 13.
As a result of the above, it is possible to prevent the outer rail 14 from shifting out of position or vibrating, while also facilitating the processing of the outer rail 14 and its attachment to the game board 11.

In particular, in this embodiment, the guide holes gh are not formed at the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14.
That is, when an impact is applied to the top and bottom sides or the left and right sides of the game board 11, the impact is strongly transmitted to the upper apex P1 or the left apex P2 of the outer rail 14. As a result, if guide holes gh are formed at the upper apex P1 and the left apex P2 of the outer rail 14, the strength of the upper apex P1 and the left apex P2 will be reduced due to the formation of the guide holes gh, and there is a risk that the outer rail 14 will be damaged when the above-mentioned impact is transmitted. Therefore, by forming the guide holes gh in a manner that avoids the upper apex P1 and the left apex P2 of the outer rail 14, it is possible to suppress damage to the outer rail 14.
In this embodiment, no guide hole gh is formed in the third region H3. This makes it possible to easily process the outer rail 14 and attach it to the rail base 13. Note that one or more guide holes gh may be formed in the third region H3.

As described above, in this embodiment, five guide holes gh are formed in the outer rail 14 along the longitudinal direction. In this case, the arrangement intervals of the five guide holes gh are non-uniform. In particular, the arrangement intervals of the five guide holes gh are set so as to become wider toward the tip end side (terminal end side). In other words, the arrangement intervals of the five guide holes gh are set so as to become narrower toward the base end side (starting end side).
Each guide hole gh is formed at a position where it does not come into contact with the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430. That is, as shown in Fig. 25, each guide hole gh is formed at the end of the inner side (the front side of the game board 11) in the width direction of the outer rail 14. In particular, each guide hole gh is formed at a position on the inner side (the front side of the game board 11) in the width direction of the outer rail 14, which is a position that is a radius of the game ball from the front side of the game board 11.

Next, a method for attaching each of the rails 12, 14 to the game board 11 (base plate 11a) will be described.
To attach the inner rail 12 to the game board 11, a positioning protrusion (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner rail 12 is inserted into a positioning recess (not shown) provided on the front side of the game board 11. This positions the inner rail 12 at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board 11. The inner rail 12 is then fixed to the front side of the game board 11 by screws.
To attach the outer rail 14 to the game board 11, first, the rail base 13 is attached to the front of the game board 11. To do this, a positioning protrusion (not shown) provided on the back side of the rail base 13 is inserted into a positioning recess (not shown) provided on the front of the game board 11. This positions the rail base 13 at a predetermined position on the front of the game board 11. The rail base 13 is then fixed to the front of the game board 11 by screws.
Next, the outer rail 14 is attached to the rail base 13. For this, the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 is arranged along the guide surface 13b of the rail base 13. In addition, the base end side bent portion 14a of the outer rail 14 is inserted (fitted) into the base end side support portion of the rail base 13, and the tip end side bent portion 14b of the outer rail 14 is inserted (fitted) into the tip end side support portion of the rail base 13. Furthermore, each protrusion pr provided on the guide surface 13b is inserted (fitted) into each guide hole gh provided in the outer rail 14. As a result, the outer rail 14 is attached to the rail base 13 with substantially the entire longitudinal direction of the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 supported by the guide surface 13b.

In front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is defined by an inner rail 12, an outer rail 14, etc. In the game area 30, a left path (left hitting area) formed on the left side of the image display device 31 and a right path (right hitting area) formed on the right side of the image display device 31 are configured as paths along which game balls flow.
In addition, the inner guide surface 12a of the inner rail 12 and the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 are arranged facing each other at a predetermined distance in front of the game board 11. A launch passage r1 that guides the game balls launched by the game ball launcher 430 to the game area 30 is formed between the inner guide surface 12a and the outer guide surface 14c.
In addition, a guide passage r2 that guides (guides) the game ball launched from the launch passage r1 to the right-side path is formed in the game area 30. The guide passage r2 is formed at the upper end of the game area 30. The guide passage r2 is formed above the image display device 31. The guide passage r2 extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
In this embodiment, the outer guide surface 14c constitutes the outer peripheral surface ra of the guide passage r2. A decorative portion 33 is provided above the opening in the front of the game board 11. The upper surface of the decorative portion 33 constitutes the inner peripheral surface rb of the guide passage r2.
A game ball launched by the game ball launcher 430 passes through the launch passage r1 and flows into the game area 30. In this case, if the momentum of the launched game ball is weak, the game ball that passed through the launch passage r1 flows into the left path. On the other hand, if the momentum of the launched game ball is strong, the game ball that passed through the launch passage r1 passes through the guide passage r2 and flows into the right path.

(Regarding the positional relationship between the design portion 40 and the guide passage r2)
Next, the positional relationship between the design portion 40 and the guide passage r2 will be described.
Fig. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 27 is an enlarged view of Fig. 26. Note that in Figs. 26 and 27, the game ball is indicated by the symbol "B".
As shown in Fig. 26, a design portion 40 is provided at the upper end of the front frame unit 4. When viewed from the front side, the design portion 40 is provided so as to surround the transparent plates g1 and g2. The design portion 40 is provided so as to bulge (protrude) from the front side of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side. In particular, the design portion 40 is provided so as to bulge (protrude) toward the front side relative to the transparent plates g1 and g2.
Specifically, the design portion 40 is configured to include an upper surface 41 extending from the front of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side, a front surface 42 extending downward from the front end (front end) of the upper surface 41, and a lower surface 43 extending toward the rear side from the lower end of the front surface 42. As a result, the design portion 40 is configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section.
The rear end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 extends to the front surface of the transparent plate g1. In this embodiment, the rear end of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 contacts the front surface of the transparent plate g1.
In particular, the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is inclined in the depth direction so that the front side is lower and the rear side is higher. As a result, when viewed from the front side, the lower end of the design portion 40 covers (conceals) a part of the upper end of the game board 11.
Further, the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is curved so that each end in the left-right direction is lower and the center portion in the left-right direction is higher.

In the following description, as shown in Figures 26 and 27, a virtual line that is perpendicular to the front of the game board 11 and passes through the uppermost (vertex/top) portion of the outer peripheral surface ra of the guide passage r2 (hereinafter referred to as the "outer peripheral vertex") is defined as the "first reference line k1." Note that, in this embodiment, the outer peripheral vertex coincides with the upper vertex P1.
A virtual line that extends vertically, intersects the first reference line k1, and intersects the rear end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is defined as a "first vertical line" (not shown). A portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects with the first vertical line is defined as a "first design portion d1."
A virtual line that extends vertically, intersects the first reference line k1, and intersects the lowest portion (lowest portion) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is defined as a "second vertical line" (not shown). A portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects with the second vertical line is defined as a "second design portion d2."
In addition, a virtual line that is perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 11 and passes through a portion of the inner peripheral surface rb of the guide passage r2 that is located directly below the outer periphery apex is defined as a "second reference line k2." In other words, the second reference line k2 is directly below the first reference line k1 and is parallel to the first reference line k1.
As a result, an imaginary line that extends vertically, intersects with the second reference line k2, and intersects with the rear end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 coincides with the first vertical line. As described above, the portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects with the first vertical line becomes the first design portion d1.
In addition, an imaginary line that extends vertically, intersects the second reference line k2, and intersects the lowest portion (lowest portion) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 coincides with the second vertical line. As described above, the portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects with the second vertical line becomes the second design portion d2.

In this embodiment, the first design portion d1 is disposed below (at a lower position) the first reference line k1. In particular, the distance (dimension) A from the first reference line k1 to the first design portion d1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 mm in this embodiment). Here, the distance A is the difference in elevation between the position of the first reference line k1 and the position of the first design portion d1.
In this embodiment, the second design portion d2 is disposed below (at a lower position) the first reference line k1. In particular, the distance (dimension) B from the first reference line k1 to the second design portion d2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (40 mm in this embodiment). Here, the distance B is the difference in elevation between the position of the first reference line k1 and the position of the second design portion d2.
In this embodiment, the second design part d2 is disposed below (at a lower position) than the first reference line k1, and in particular, the distance B from the first reference line k1 to the second design part d2 is set to be equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so that the design part 40 can be enlarged in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the distance A from the first reference line k1 to the first design part d1 is set to be equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, so that when the game ball is strongly launched by the game ball launching device 430 and the game ball rolls along the outer peripheral surface ra of the guide passage r2, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the front side. In this way, since the visibility of the game ball is ensured in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the game ball and to play normally. As a result, it is possible to play stably.

In this embodiment, the first design portion d1 is disposed above (at a higher position than) the second reference line k2. In particular, the distance (dimension) C from the second reference line k2 to the first design portion d1 is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball (14 mm in this embodiment). Here, the distance C is the difference in elevation between the position of the second reference line k2 and the position of the first design portion d1.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second design portion d2 is disposed below (at a lower position) the second reference line k2. In particular, the distance (dimension) D from the second reference line k2 to the second design portion d2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (22 mm in this embodiment). Here, the distance D is the difference in elevation between the position of the second reference line k2 and the position of the second design portion d2.
In this embodiment, the second design part d2 is disposed below (at a lower position) than the second reference line k2, and in particular, the distance D from the second reference line k2 to the second design part d2 is set to be equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so that the design part 40 can be enlarged in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the distance C from the second reference line k2 to the first design part d1 is set to be equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball, so that when the game ball is weakly launched by the game ball launching device 430 and the game ball rolls along the inner peripheral surface rb of the guide passage r2, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the front side. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the game ball is ensured, so that the player is prevented from missing the game ball and can play normally. As a result, it is possible to play the game stably.

(Regarding the panel lamp 21 and the image display device 31)
A board lamp 21 (see FIG. 28) is disposed in the play area 30 of the game board 11. The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are driven by dynamic lighting control.
The image display device 31 is attached to the rear side of the set board and is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
The image display device 31 includes a display screen 31a capable of displaying various types of performance images (moving images and still images).
The display screen 31a can be configured with three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) in which the first performance symbol z1 (not shown) is displayed. Also, as described above, the fourth symbol display device 61 can be configured with a second performance symbol display area a4 (not shown) in which the second performance symbol z2 (not shown) is displayed.
The first performance symbol z1 is configured to include identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In each of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform a variable display and a stationary display of the first performance symbol z1.
The second effect symbol z2 is composed of a color bar. In the second effect symbol display area a4, the second effect symbol z2 can be displayed in a variable manner and a stationary manner.

The changing display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 refers to a display in which the first performance pattern z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the type of the second performance pattern z2 displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is changed sequentially).
The stopped display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 refers to a display in which one type of first performance pattern z1 is stopped at the lottery result display position of each of the first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and one type of second performance pattern z2 is displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 (the color bar shows a specified color).
Then, the result of the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) is displayed based on the combination of the first performance pattern z1 displayed in a stopped state in the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 and the second performance pattern z2 displayed in a stopped state in the second performance pattern display area a4.
In addition, the display screen 31a can be configured with reserved symbol display areas b1, b2 (not shown) in which a reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
The reserved symbol display area b1 displays reserved symbols h corresponding to game information during notification display (variable display and stop display of special symbols). The reserved symbol display area b2 displays reserved symbols h corresponding to game information for which notification display is pending.

(Configuration of the game area 30)
Next, the configuration of the play area 30 will be described.
A first starting opening 51 is provided below the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The first starting opening 51 is an entry opening (a so-called "navel") that opens upward, and game balls can enter at any time. The first starting opening 51 allows game balls flowing down the left path to enter (game balls flowing down the right path cannot enter).
A special symbol 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 28) is disposed in the first start port 51. The special symbol 1 start port switch 101 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the first start port 51 (entry of a game ball into the first start port 51). The main control board 200 executes a first special symbol lottery in response to input of a detection signal from the special symbol 1 start port switch 101.

Other winning holes 55a to 55e are provided to the left of the first starting hole 51 in the game area 30. Each of the other winning holes 55a to 55e is an entry hole that opens upward (or diagonally upward), and is always capable of receiving game balls. Each of the other winning holes 55a to 55e is capable of receiving game balls that flow down the left path (but not game balls that flow down the right path).
An other winning port switch 106 (see FIG. 28) is disposed on the game board 11. The other winning port switch 106 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the other winning ports 55a to 55f (entry of a game ball into the other winning ports 55a to 55f). In response to the input of the detection signal from the other winning port switch 106, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of prize balls.

A composite winning device 70 is provided to the right of the display screen 31a in the game area 30. Within the composite winning device 70, a downstream portion of the right path is configured.
21, a large prize opening 53 is provided at the most upstream position in the compound prize-winning device 70. The large prize opening 53 is provided with a special electric device (special electric device) 53a that can be displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 53 and an open state that makes it possible (or easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 53.
The special electric device 53a is opened and closed by a special electric device solenoid 65 (see FIG. 28). The special electric device 53a is normally closed and the big prize opening 53 is not capable of receiving game balls, but when a "small win" or "big win" is won by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), the special electric device 53a is opened and the game balls can enter. The big prize opening 53 is capable of receiving game balls that flow down the right path (but not game balls that flow down the left path).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 28) is disposed in the large prize opening 53. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the large prize opening 53 (entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 53). In response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball.

In addition, within the large prize opening 53, there are provided a V area (not shown), a discharge area (not shown), and a distribution means (not shown) that distributes a game ball that enters the large prize opening 53 to one of the V area and the discharge area.
A V-area switch 110 (see FIG. 28) is disposed in the V-area. The V-area switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the V-area (passage of the V-area by a game ball). In response to input of the detection signal from the V-area switch 110, the main control board 200 sets "1" in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 described later.
The distribution means can be switched between a V-passing state in which the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 53 is distributed to the V region, and a non-V-passing state in which the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 53 is distributed to the discharge region.
That is, when the distribution means is displaced to the V-passing state, all game balls that enter the large prize opening 53 are distributed to the V region. This makes it impossible for game balls that enter the large prize opening 53 to pass through the discharge region.
On the other hand, when the distribution means is displaced to the non-V passing state, all game balls that enter the large prize opening 53 are distributed to the discharge area. This makes it impossible for game balls that enter the large prize opening 53 to pass through the V area.
The distribution means is displaced by a V-zone solenoid 66 (see FIG. 28).
A game ball that enters the big prize opening 53 is first detected by the count switch 103, then distributed to one of the V area and the discharge area by the distribution means, and after passing through that area, is discharged to the discharge path. At this time, the game ball distributed to the V area is detected by the V area switch 110.

A second starting port 52 is provided downstream of the large winning port 53 in the compound winning device 70. The second starting port 52 is provided with a normal electric device (normal electric device) 52a (so-called "electric tulip") that can be displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 52 and an open state that makes it possible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 52.
The normal electric role 52a is opened and closed by a normal electric role solenoid 64 (see FIG. 28). The second start opening 52 is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter, but when the normal symbol lottery is won, the normal electric role 52a is opened so that the game ball can enter. The second start opening 52 allows the game ball flowing down the right path to enter (but does not allow the game ball flowing down the left path to enter).
A special symbol 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 28) is disposed in the second start port 52. The special symbol 2 start port switch 102 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the second start port 52 (entry of a game ball into the second start port 52). The main control board 200 executes a second special symbol lottery in response to input of the detection signal from the special symbol 2 start port switch 102.

An operating port 54 is provided downstream of the second starting port 52 in the composite winning device 70. The operating port 54 is an entry port that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. The operating port 54 allows game balls flowing down the right path to enter (game balls flowing down the left path cannot enter).
An actuation port switch 104 (see FIG. 28) is disposed within the actuation port 54. The actuation port switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the actuation port 54 (entry of a game ball into the actuation port 54). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery in response to input of the detection signal from the actuation port switch 104.

The other winning hole 55f is provided on the side of the second starting hole 52 in the compound winning device 70. As described above, the game ball that enters the other winning hole 55f is detected by the other winning hole switch 106.
In addition, at the lowest position in the game area 30, an outlet 58 is provided for discharging game balls that do not enter (win) any of the winning holes 51 to 54, 55a to 55f.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which the game balls discharged from the play area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that all game balls shot into the play area 30 (all game balls discharged from the play area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game balls shot into the play area 30 are discharged from the play area 30 by entering any of the winning holes 51 to 54, 55a to 55e or by passing through the out hole 58, and flow into the discharge path.
Specifically, the game balls entering each of the winning holes 51 to 54, 55a to 55f are detected by the switches 101 to 103, 106 disposed in the winning hole, and then guided to the discharge path. Also, the game balls discharged from the outlet 58 are guided to the discharge path.
An out switch 109 (see FIG. 28) is disposed in the inner frame unit 3. The out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to each of the winning holes 51 to 54 and 55a to 55f.

A main display device 60 is disposed on the game board 11. The main display device 60 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured of a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED).
The main display device 60 displays information related to the game.
The main display device 60 is composed of a special chart 1 display device, a special chart 2 display device, a regular chart display device, a special chart 1 reserve display device, a special chart 2 reserve display device, a regular chart reserve display device, a round display device, a right-hand hit display device, and a time-saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
In the main display device 60, LED1 to LED8 constitute the special chart 1 display device, LED7 to LED16 constitute the special chart 2 display device, LED17 and 18 constitute the normal chart display device, LED19 to LED23 constitute the round display device, LED24 constitutes the right-hit display device, LED25 and 26 constitute the special chart 1 reserved display device, LED27 and 28 constitute the special chart 2 reserved display device, LED29 and 30 constitute the normal chart reserved display device, and LED32 constitutes the time-saving display device. Note that LED31 is not used in the pachinko machine 1.

The special symbol 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, patterns, etc. Then, the special symbol 1 display device displays the result of the first special symbol lottery by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special symbol 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special symbol consisting of numbers, patterns, etc. Then, the special symbol 2 display device displays the result of the second special symbol lottery by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) on the special pattern display device and the display of the performance patterns z1, z2 in the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4 correspond to the time when the varying display starts, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern, respectively.
Then, when the first special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 1 display device becomes a specific pattern (small win pattern), or when the second special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device becomes a specific pattern (small win pattern), a small win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is created.
In addition, when the first special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 1 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), or when the second special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is created.

The normal symbol display device is capable of displaying the variable and stationary normal symbols, which consist of numbers, symbols, etc. The normal symbol lottery result is displayed on the normal symbol display device based on the stationary normal symbol. When the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (a normal symbol winning symbol), a normal symbol winning game state, which is an advantageous game state for the player, is created.

The special pattern 1 pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery is pending (special pattern 1 pending number).
The special pattern 2 reserved display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery is reserved (special pattern 2 reserved number).
The regular symbol pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is pending (regular symbol pending number).
The round display device displays the number of rounds of play executed during the jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state).
The right-hand shot display device displays the path (left hand path or right hand path) along which the game ball should be shot.
The time-saving display device displays the current game status (time-saving control being executed or stopped).

In addition, one or more movable body units (not shown) are provided in the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, one or more movable body units are provided in the front frame unit 4, and one or more movable body units are provided in the game board unit 10.
Each movable body unit of the front frame unit 4 is arranged on the front side of the design portion 40, on the upper surface of the receiving tray unit SU, etc., and is capable of performing predetermined performance operations.
Each movable body unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set board. Specifically, each movable body unit is disposed in the space between the game board 11 and the image display device 31 (display screen 31a) (hereinafter referred to as the "performance space"). Each movable body unit is capable of performing a predetermined performance action in the performance space.
Each movable body unit includes a performance member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 24 (see FIG. 28). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 28) is used as the drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a solenoid may be used as the drive source.
The performance member can be displaced in a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the performance member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a performance position. The performance member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23.

The position detection sensor 24 is composed of a photo sensor or the like. The position detection sensor 24 detects the position of the performance member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 24 includes a light-projecting unit and a light-receiving unit that receives the light projected from the light-projecting unit. The position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the performance control board 300 in response to the light-receiving unit receiving (detecting) the light projected from the light-projecting unit. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 24 stops outputting the detection signal to the performance control board 300 when the light-receiving unit does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light-projecting unit.
Also, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position of the performance member. Then, when the performance member is placed in the initial position, the shielding plate is placed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 24, blocking the entry of light into the light receiving portion. As a result, when the performance member is placed in the initial position, the output of a detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 to the performance control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the performance member is not placed in the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 24 to the performance control board 300.
This makes it possible for the performance control board 300 to detect whether or not the performance component is placed in the initial position depending on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24.

The pachinko machine 1 is also provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal conditions.
In this embodiment, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are provided as detection sensors.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the front frame unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400 in response to the opening of the front frame unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2.

The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibrations of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is disposed on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibrations of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensors 114 detect radio waves generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are provided on the game board 11. Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a radio wave.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is provided in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). In addition, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided in the game board 11. The magnetic detection sensor 115 provided in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. In addition, each magnetic detection sensor 115 provided on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple control boards, such as a main control board 200, a performance control board 300, a payout control board 400, a power supply board 600 that supplies power (electricity) to each of the control boards 200, 300, 400, etc., a driver board 330, a sub-connection board 340, etc.
The control boards 200, 300, 400, and 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards, and are housed in individual board cases.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The dispensing control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the dispensing control board 400 is attached to the rear side of the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3.

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer, a clock generating circuit 202, a random number generating circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, a sink driver 240, and source drivers 250a, 250b, etc.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, etc.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in Fig. 6, the memory area used by the CPU 210 is configured to include a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230.
The ROM 220 includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and a non-used area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 is configured to include a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without including the unused area.

The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area stores a program (program code) for executing processing related to tests defined by the gaming machine rules, and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined by the gaming machine rules, and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
In addition, an unused area m3 of a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2 in the ROM 220. This clarifies the boundary between the used area m1 and the unused area m2.

The RAM 230 includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and a non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The usage area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Note that the use area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area is composed of a set value area, a gaming machine status flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error-related area, a normal game-related area 1, and a normal game-related area 2.
The set value area stores a set value. The gaming machine status flag area stores a gaming machine status flag. The checksum area stores a checksum. The backup flag area stores a backup flag. The error-related area stores information related to an error. The normal game-related area 1 stores a subcommand pointer, etc. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game status, etc. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 includes an area (a game information storage area described later) for storing game information acquired upon input of a detection signal from each of the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the special figure 2 start port switch 102, and the operation port switch 104.

The non-used area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program stored in unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of a program stored in unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area, which is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Furthermore, an unused area M3 of a certain number of bytes (16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area M1 and the unused area M2 in the RAM 230. This clarifies the boundary between the used area M1 and the unused area M2.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 MHz in this embodiment), and outputs this clock to both the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 .
The random number generating circuit 203 is configured to include a first loop counter which generates a winning random number for the normal pattern lottery, a second loop counter which generates a jackpot random number for the first special pattern lottery, a third loop counter which generates a jackpot random number for the second special pattern lottery, and a fourth loop counter which generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter generates a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the second loop counter value is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the third loop counter value is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter generates reach group random numbers by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once per 32 divisions of the clock frequency). In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s]/12 [MHz]=2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input port 0 to input port 3).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 115, etc.
To the input port 1, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, a handle detection signal from the launch enabling condition detection unit 422, and the like are input.
To input port 2, a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the other winning port switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, a detection signal from the other radio wave detection sensor 114, etc. are input.
The input port 3 receives a detection signal from the special FIG. 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special FIG. 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the operation port switch 104, etc.

Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data is set that indicates the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor.
Specifically, a "1" is set in the receiving memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor when a detection signal is input from that switch/sensor (high level), and a "0" is set when no detection signal is input from that switch/sensor (low level).

The output port 205 is configured to include a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output port 0 to output port 4).
The output port 0 outputs data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60. The data signals output from the output port 0 are then input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals ("COM0" to "COM3") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, a launch permission signal for detecting launch conditions (described later), etc. The common signals output from the output port 1 are input to the sink driver 240.

The output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the operation of the normal electric feature solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the operation of the special electric feature solenoid 65, a control signal for controlling the operation of the V-area solenoid 66, etc.
The output port 4 outputs data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206. The data signals output from the output port 4 are then input to the source driver 250b.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. The CPU 210 transmits a control command (sub-command) from the command output port 1 to the performance control board 300, and transmits a control command (payout command) from the command output port 2 to the payout control board 400.
Each of the command output ports 1 and 2 has a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown).
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on a subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is made up of a plurality of registers and is capable of storing a plurality of control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the order in which they were input.
The transmitting shift register performs parallel-to-serial conversion on the control commands input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits them as serial data to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured with a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED). Note that the performance display device 206 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be seen by the player.
As described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the following states of the gaming machine (hereinafter, "gaming machine state") are defined: a playable state, a setting change state, a setting check state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state. Then, the information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display unit is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a seven-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot segment LED capable of displaying dots such as decimal points.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED 33 to LED 64). In the performance display device 206, LED 33 to LED 40 are a display section for the first digit, LED 41 to LED 48 are a display section for the second digit, LED 49 to LED 56 are a display section for the third digit, and LED 57 to LED 64 are a display section for the fourth digit.

During the playable state, the game can proceed. During the playable state, the performance display device 206 displays the base ratio.
In this embodiment, while a playable state occurs, the performance display device 206 alternately displays a first base ratio and a second base ratio at predetermined time intervals (5.0 [s] in this embodiment).
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio for the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous interval (the final base ratio calculated for the previous interval).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top two digits display information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio), and the bottom two digits display a number indicating the base ratio (percentage).

During the setting change state, the setting values can be changed. During the setting change state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that a setting change state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the third top digit displays "-"), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.
During the setting confirmation state, the setting values can be confirmed. During the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the top digit displays no display), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.

During the occurrence of a game stop state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), it is impossible to continue playing the game. During the occurrence of a game stop state, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that a game stop state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "E", the second top digit displays "r.", and the top digit displays no display), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred (setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, or backup abnormality state).

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation portion that can be pressed. When the operation portion is pressed, the RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured to include an operation unit with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole, and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. When the operation unit is in the ON state, the setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to each of the display devices 60 and 206 in response to the common signals (“COM 0 ” to “COM 3 ”) output from the output port 1 .
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 in response to the data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") output from output port 0.
The source driver 250 b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 in response to the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4 .

The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a source driver 250a corresponding to the main display device 60 and a source driver 250b corresponding to the performance display device 206. The application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal lines is controlled separately for the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, a common sink driver 240 is provided for the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. The grounding of the common signal line is controlled collectively by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
This eliminates the need to provide sink drivers 240 corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and as a result, it eliminates the need to provide output ports (output ports for outputting common signals) corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of components required to control the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and it is no longer necessary for the main control board 200 (CPU 210) to generate common signals corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, making it possible to reduce the control load for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.

Furthermore, the main control board 200 is configured to include a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In a test signal output process (step S4-24) described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, time-saving control execution state, probability state of special symbol selection, etc.) and stores the generated test signal in a port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a specified output port. The test signal output from the specified output port is then input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
In addition, in the main control board 200, detection signals from the special chart 1 start port switch 101, the special chart 2 start port switch 102, the operation port switch 104, the count switch 103, the other winning port switch 106, the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204 and are input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, control signals for controlling the operation of each solenoid (normal electric feature solenoid 64, special electric feature solenoid 65, V-area solenoid 66, etc.) output from output port 3 are input to each solenoid 64 to 66, and are also input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of the dispensing control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the dispensing control board 400 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the firing condition detection circuit and the firing control circuit.
The payout control board 400 controls the launch of game balls into the game area 30 and the payout of the game balls.
The dispensing control board 400 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, etc.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (prize ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200. The payout control board 400 also controls the game ball payout operation (loan ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the ball loan instruction signal received from the CR unit 700.
In addition, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching device 430 (launching solenoid 431) based on the resistance value (voltage value) input from the launch volume 411, the touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, the launch stop signal input from the launch stop switch 413, the launch permission signal input from the main control board 200, and the CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700.
The method of controlling the game ball launching operation by the payout control board 400 will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 29, the payout control board 400 is configured to include a launch condition detection circuit 420 and a launch control circuit 425 as circuits for controlling the game ball payout operation.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 is a circuit that detects whether a firing condition, which will be described later, is satisfied.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 is configured to include an operation detection unit 421 , a firing enabling condition detection unit 422 , and a firing condition detection unit 423 .
The operation detection unit 421 is a circuit that detects the rotation operation (amount of rotation operation) of the handle operation unit.
The operation detection unit 421 includes an operational amplifier that controls the output of an operation detection signal (setting the operation detection signal to a high level or low level) in accordance with the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411 .

Specifically, in the firing handle unit 6, the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle operating portion. The operation detection portion 421 detects the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411, and detects whether or not the handle operating portion is being rotated and the amount of rotation of the handle operating portion based on the detected resistance value (voltage value).
When the operation detection unit 421 detects a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, it generates an operation detection signal and outputs the generated operation detection signal to the launch enable condition detection unit 422 (sets the operation detection signal to a high level). On the other hand, when the operation detection unit 421 does not detect a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, it stops outputting the operation detection signal to the launch enable condition detection unit 422 (sets the operation detection signal to a low level).
In addition, when the operation detection unit 421 detects a rotational operation of the handle operating unit, it generates a firing intensity signal corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the handle operating unit (the resistance value of the firing volume 411), and outputs the generated firing intensity signal to the firing control circuit 425.

The launch enabling condition detection unit 422 is a circuit that detects the establishment of a launch enabling condition.
The launch condition detection unit 422 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of a specified signal depending on the result of a logical AND operation of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal, and a transistor that switches the output/stop of the handle detection signal depending on the specified signal output from the AND gate IC.
The "launch enabling condition" is a condition related to the player's operation (the player's intention) among the multiple conditions that make up the launch conditions described below.
The conditions for enabling firing include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit), (2) a condition based on the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (detection status of the player's contact with the handle operation unit), and (3) a condition based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (detection status of the operation of pressing the firing stop button).

In this embodiment, the launch possible condition is met when all of the following conditions are met: (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 detect a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, (2) the touch sensor 412 detects contact with the handle operation unit by the player, and (3) the firing stop switch 413 does not detect a press operation of the firing stop button. On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not met, the launch possible condition is not met.
Here, the conditions for enabling firing include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit) and (2) a condition based on the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (detection status of the player's contact with the handle operation unit), and (3) a condition based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (detection status of the operation of pressing the firing stop button) may not be included.
In other words, the launchable condition is met when both of the following conditions are met: (1) the launch volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 detect the rotational operation of the handle operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 detects contact with the handle operation unit by the player. Alternatively, the launchable condition may not be met when at least one of the conditions (1) and (2) is not met.

Specifically, the launch possible condition detection unit 422 detects whether or not the launch possible condition is met based on the operation detection signal input from the operation detection unit 421, the touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, and the launch stop signal input from the launch stop switch 413.
At this time, the launch enabling condition detection unit 422 detects the establishment of the launch enabling condition when the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal are all input, whereas the establishment of the launch enabling condition is not detected when at least one of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal is not input.
When the launchable condition detection unit 422 detects that the launchable condition is met, it generates a handle detection signal and outputs the generated handle detection signal to both the main control board 200 and the launch condition detection unit 423 (sets the handle detection signal to a high level). On the other hand, when the launchable condition detection unit 422 does not detect that the launchable condition is met, it stops outputting the handle detection signal to both the main control board 200 and the launch condition detection unit 423 (sets the handle detection signal to a low level).

The firing condition detection unit 423 is a circuit that detects whether a firing condition is met.
The firing condition detection unit 423 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of the firing signal depending on the result of the logical AND operation of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal.
The "launch conditions" are conditions for executing the launch of a game ball (game ball launching operation) into the game area 30 by the game ball launching device 430 (launch solenoid 431).
In this embodiment, the launch condition is met when all of the following conditions are met: (1) the launch enable condition is met, (2) a launch permission signal is input from the main control board 200, and (3) a CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700. On the other hand, the launch condition is not met when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not met.
The "launch permission signal" is output from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection unit 423 when a playable state is set, assuming that communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected).

Here, during the period when the power is turned on to the main control board 200, regardless of the state of the gaming machine, the launch permission signal may be output from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection unit 423. In other words, when communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is possible (when the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), the launch permission signal may be output from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection unit 423.
The "CR connection signal" is output from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection unit 423 when communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the dispensing control board 400 (when the CR unit 700 and the dispensing control board 400 are electrically connected).

Specifically, the launch condition detection unit 423 detects whether the launch conditions are met based on the handle detection signal input from the launch enable condition detection unit 422, the launch permission signal input from the main control board 200, and the CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700.
At this time, the firing condition detection unit 423 detects the establishment of the firing condition when the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal are all inputted, whereas the firing condition detection unit 423 does not detect the establishment of the firing condition when at least one of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal is not inputted.
When the firing condition detection unit 423 detects that the firing condition is satisfied, it generates a firing signal and outputs the generated firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (sets the firing signal to a high level). On the other hand, when the firing condition detection unit 423 does not detect that the firing condition is satisfied, it stops outputting the firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (sets the firing signal to a low level).

The launch control circuit 425 is a circuit that controls the launch strength of the game balls by the game ball launcher 430 and the launch timing of the game balls by the game ball launcher 430. In other words, the launch control circuit 425 controls the output of a drive signal to the game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431).
Specifically, the firing control circuit 425 includes a clock generating section (not shown), a firing timing control section (not shown), and a firing solenoid driving section (not shown).
The clock generating section outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency to the emission timing control section.
The firing timing control unit generates a pulse signal for controlling the firing timing based on the clock signal input from the clock generating unit, and outputs the generated pulse signal to the firing solenoid driving unit. At this time, the firing timing control unit generates the pulse signal so that the number of game balls fired per minute is a predetermined number (e.g., 100 [balls]).

The firing solenoid drive unit controls the output of a drive signal to the firing solenoid 431 based on a firing signal input from the firing condition detection unit 423, a pulse signal input from the firing timing control unit, and a firing intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421.
Specifically, when a launch signal is input from the launch condition detection unit 423, the launch solenoid drive unit, in response to a pulse signal input from the launch timing control unit, outputs a drive signal (drive current) corresponding to the launch intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421 to the launch solenoid 431. This causes the game ball to be launched with an intensity corresponding to the launch intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421.
On the other hand, when the launch signal is not input from the launch condition detection unit 423, the launch solenoid drive unit stops outputting the drive signal to the launch solenoid 431. This stops the launch of the game balls.

The game ball launching device 430 includes a striking hammer (not shown) and a launch solenoid 431 that drives the striking hammer. The launch solenoid 431 is a rotary solenoid. The striking hammer may be driven by another driving source such as a motor.
A ball feed unit (not shown) supplies game balls to the game ball launcher 430. When a drive signal is input to the launch solenoid 431, the launch solenoid 431 is driven in response to the input drive signal, and the game ball is shot out by the hitting mallet. This causes the game ball to be launched into the game area 30.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, assuming that a playable state is set in the main control board 200 and that communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400, when the handle operation part is rotated (displaced from the initial position toward the limit position) by the player's contact without the firing stop button being pressed, the game ball firing operation by the game ball launcher 430 is started. Then, while the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is being performed, game balls are launched into the play area 30 with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the handle operation part.
Furthermore, when the launch stop button is pressed, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped. That is, even if the handle operation unit is being rotated by contact with the player, when the launch stop button is pressed, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped.
Furthermore, when the handle operation unit is returned to the initial position (when the handle operation unit is not being rotated), the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped. In other words, even if the player is in contact with the handle operation unit, when the handle operation unit is returned to the initial position, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, while a state in which the launch conditions are satisfied (hereinafter referred to as the "launch state") occurs, the output of a handle detection signal from the launch condition detection unit 422 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
In other words, during a state in which rotation operation of the handle operating unit is detected, contact with the handle operating unit is detected, and pressing of the launch stop button is not detected (launch possible state), the output of the handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
In this case, as long as the launch-enabled state is occurring, the output of a handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained, regardless of whether a launch permission signal is input from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of the gaming machine state set in the main control board 200).
Furthermore, as long as the firing possible state is occurring, the output of a handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained regardless of whether a CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of whether communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the dispensing control board 400).
As a result of the above, the main control board 200 is able to detect (grasp) whether or not a launch-enabled state is occurring, and it becomes possible to control the progress of the game, the content of the presentation, etc., depending on the occurrence status of the launch-enabled state.

In other words, when the main control board 200 detects that the handle detection signal has changed from a state where it is not input to a state where it is input (the handle detection signal has changed from a low level to a high level), it transmits a game status designation command to the performance control board 300, specifying the occurrence (start) of a launch-ready state.
On the other hand, when the main control board 200 detects that the handle detection signal has changed from an input state to an input state (the handle detection signal has changed from a high level to a low level), it sends a game status designation command to the performance control board 300 to specify the release (end) of the launch-ready state.
This enables the performance control board 300 to detect the occurrence of a launch-ready state by receiving a game status designation command that specifies the occurrence of a launch-ready state, and to detect the cancellation of the launch-ready state by receiving a game status designation command that specifies the cancellation of the launch-ready state.
The performance control board 300 is then able to change the content of the performance depending on whether or not a firing-ready state is occurring.

(Configuration of the performance control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the performance control board.
The performance control board 300 controls the performances (display performances, sound performances, lamp performances, movable body performances, etc.) based on control commands received from the main control board 200.
As shown in FIG. 30, the performance control board 300 is composed of a microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 301 and various external devices externally connected to the microcomputer 301.
In this embodiment, various external devices include a control ROM 302, a character generator read only memory (CGROM) 303, a dynamic random access memory (DRAM) 304, and the like.

The control ROM 302 stores a control program for controlling the operation of the microcomputer 301, various data required for executing the control program, etc. In particular, the control ROM 302 stores (memorizes) performance scenario data corresponding to each performance number, animation data corresponding to each display performance number, sound scenario data corresponding to each sound performance number, lamp scenario data corresponding to each lamp performance number, movable body scenario data corresponding to each movable body performance number, various compressed lamp drive data, and various compressed motor drive data.
The "compressed lamp drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the lamp drive data in a predetermined format. The "lamp drive data" is data for driving the various lamps 20, 21 (data specifying the luminance values of the lamps 20, 21 belonging to each system).
The "compressed motor drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) motor drive data in a predetermined format. The "motor drive data" is data for driving various motors 23 (data that specifies the output value of each motor 23).
In this embodiment, a NOR type flash memory (NOR type ROM) is used as the control ROM 302. Here, the control ROM 302 may be configured to use an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory).
The control ROM 302 is connected to the HOST interface 313 of the microcomputer 301 .

The CGROM 303 stores (memorizes) various types of compressed image data, various types of compressed audio data, and the like.
"Compressed image data" is data that has been compressed (encoded) into a specific format. "Image data (material data)" is data of an image (moving image or still image) that is used as the material for drawing processing.
The "compressed audio data" is audio data compressed (encoded) in a predetermined format. The "audio data" is audio data output from the various speakers 22.
In this embodiment, a NAND type flash memory (NAND type ROM) is used as the CGROM 303. Specifically, the CGROM 303 is configured of an SSD (Solid State Drive) that uses a NAND type flash memory as a storage unit.
The CGROM 303 is connected to a CG bus interface 314 of the microcomputer 301. The CG bus interface 314 is a connection interface conforming to the SATA (Serial AT Attachment) standard, whereby various data stored in the CGROM 303 is read out and transferred via SATA.

The DRAM 304 is provided with a preload area, into which various data (specifically, compressed image data, compressed audio data, etc.) stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred (preloaded).
The DRAM 304 is also provided with a drawing command buffer area, a sound command buffer area, a lamp command buffer area, and a motor command buffer area. In this embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the drawing command buffer area, and the DRAM 304 is provided with two drawing command buffer areas.
The two drawing command buffer areas are configured to be the same size. During a period in which one of the two drawing command buffer areas is designated as a construction area, the other drawing command buffer area is designated as a transfer area. Furthermore, for each drawing command buffer area, the designation as a construction area and the designation as a transfer area are alternated for each frame.
Then, for each drawing command buffer area, during the period designated as the construction area, a display list, which will be described later, is stored (generated and constructed) in that drawing command buffer area, and during the period designated as the transfer area, the display list stored in that drawing command buffer area is transferred to the VDP (specifically, the preloader circuit 319).
The DRAM 304 is connected to a DRAM interface 315 of the microcomputer 301 .

The microcomputer 301 is an LSI in which a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated.
The microcomputer 301 controls the performance operations of various performance means based on control commands received from the main control board 200.
The "various performance means" include the image display device 31, the various speakers 22, the various lamps 20 and 21, and the various motors 23 (various movable bodies). Therefore, the "performance actions by the various performance means" include the display of performance images by the image display device 31, the output of sound by the various speakers 22, the driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21, the driving of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies), and the like.
The microcomputer 301 includes internal devices such as a CPU 310, a CPU work memory 311, a CPU interface 312, a host interface 313, a CG bus interface 314, a DRAM interface 315, a VRAM 316, a serial communication controller 317, a transfer circuit 318, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, a graphics decoder circuit 321, a drawing circuit 322, and a sound controller 323, and these internal devices are bus-connected to a data bus 324.

The CPU 310 is connected to a HOST interface 313 via a CPU interface 312. The main control board 200 is also connected to the HOST interface 313, and control commands are input from the main control board 200. Furthermore, a data bus 324 is connected to the HOST interface 313.
This enables the CPU 310 to receive control commands (sub-commands) from the main control board 200 via the HOST interface 313 .
In addition, the CPU 310 is capable of communicating with internal devices such as a serial communication controller 317 , a preloader circuit 319 , a display circuit 320 , and a sound controller 323 via a HOST interface 313 and a data bus 324 .
In addition, the CPU 310 is capable of reading out various data (control programs, control data, etc.) stored in the control ROM 302 via a HOST interface 313 .
In addition, the CPU 310 is capable of reading out various data (compressed audio data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the HOST interface 313 , the data bus 324 , and the CG bus interface 314 .
Furthermore, the CPU 310 is capable of reading and writing data from and to the DRAM 304 via a HOST interface 313 , a data bus 324 , and a DRAM interface 315 .

The CPU 310 executes various arithmetic processes required to control the performance actions of the various performance means, control processes of internal devices in accordance with the various arithmetic processes, and the like.
At this time, the CPU 310 uses a CPU work memory (RAM) 311 and a DRAM 304 as a work area for various arithmetic processes, a buffer area for various arithmetic process data, a table data area, a buffer area for various input/output data, and the like.
That is, the CPU 310 selects a performance (performance number) to be executed based on a control command received from the main control board 200, and selects and sets various scenario data (performance scenario data, animation data, sound scenario data, lamp scenario data, movable body scenario data, etc.) corresponding to the selected performance number. Then, according to the various scenario data selected and set, it generates internal commands (drawing commands, sound commands, lamp commands, motor commands, etc.) for controlling various internal devices (VDP, sound controller 323, lamp controller 317a, motor controller 317b, etc.).

Specifically, the CPU 310 generates a display list in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area in accordance with the animation data.
A "display list" is a collection of drawing commands for one frame. That is, the drawing commands for one frame are described in a predetermined order in the display list. Then, in the VDP, processing based on each drawing command is executed in the order described in the display list, thereby generating drawing data for one frame.
The "drawing command" is information that specifies the content of the drawing process (drawing control) to be executed by the VDP. In particular, the drawing command specifies the address of the memory area where the compressed image data used for drawing is stored (hereinafter referred to as the "image address"), the magnification (enlargement/reduction ratio) when the image data is drawn, and the coordinates (coordinates in the frame buffer area) at which the image data is drawn.
Furthermore, the CPU 310 generates sound commands in the sound command buffer area according to the sound scenario data.
The “sound command” is information that specifies the content of the sound output process (sound output control) to be executed by the sound controller 323 .
Furthermore, the CPU 310 generates lamp commands in a lamp command buffer area according to the lamp scenario data.
The "lamp command" is information that specifies the contents of the lamp drive process (lamp drive control) to be executed by the lamp controller 317a.
Furthermore, the CPU 310 generates motor commands in a motor command buffer area according to the movable body scenario data.
The "motor command" is information that specifies the content of the motor drive process (motor drive control) to be executed by the motor controller 317b.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304 .
That is, while a NAND flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can easily have a large capacity, it has a slow data read speed compared to a NOR flash memory such as the control ROM 302. For this reason, if compressed audio data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the sound controller 323 executes the audio output process, there is a risk of a significant decrease in processing performance.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before the sound output process is executed, the compressed sound data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data read speed than the CGROM 303. Then, when the sound output process is executed, the compressed sound data is read from the DRAM 304, thereby preventing a decrease in processing performance.

Specifically, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) predetermined compressed audio data from among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304. At this time, in this embodiment, all of the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304. Here, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which only a portion of the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, after the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to execute control of the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323). In other words, before the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to execute control of the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323).
After the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the image display device 31 is in a state where it is possible to control the display of the performance image (drawing process by the VDP). In other words, before the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the image display device 31 is in a state where it is impossible to control the display of the performance image (drawing process by the VDP).
On the other hand, before the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to execute control of the driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20, 21 (lamp driving process by the lamp controller 317a).
Furthermore, before the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to execute control of the drive of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive processing by the motor controller 317b).

The transfer circuit 318 transfers various types of data between internal devices.
Specifically, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area designated as the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319. In addition, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 to the drawing circuit 322.
The transfer circuit 318 also transfers sound commands stored in the sound command buffer area to the sound controller 323. The transfer circuit 318 also transfers lamp commands stored in the lamp command buffer area to the lamp controller 317a. The transfer circuit 318 also transfers motor commands stored in the motor command buffer area to the motor controller 317b.

The VRAM 316 is provided with an image development area, in which image data (material data) developed (restored and decoded) by the graphics decoder circuit 321 is temporarily stored.
A frame buffer area is also provided in the VRAM 316. In this embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the frame buffer area, and the VRAM 316 is provided with two frame buffer areas.
The two frame buffer areas are configured to be the same size. While one of the two frame buffer areas is designated as a drawing area, the other frame buffer area is designated as an output area. Furthermore, for each frame buffer area, the designation as a drawing area and the designation as an output area are alternated for each frame.
Then, for each frame buffer area, during the period designated as the drawing area, one frame's worth of drawing data is stored (generated and drawn) in that frame buffer area, and during the period designated as the output area, a video signal is output based on the one frame's worth of drawing data stored in that frame buffer area.

In the microcomputer 301, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, a graphics decoder circuit 321, a drawing circuit 322, etc. function as a VDP (Video Display Processor).
The VDP controls the display of the effect image by the image display device 31. Specifically, the VDP generates drawing data in response to reception of a display list (drawing commands) from the CPU 310, generates a video signal based on the generated drawing data, and outputs the generated video signal to the image display device 31.
The preloader circuit 319 is capable of reading out various data (compressed image data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the CG bus interface 314 .
In particular, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304 before the drawing process is executed by the drawing circuit 322 .
That is, as described above, a NAND flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can be easily increased in capacity, but has a slower data read speed, compared to a NOR flash memory such as the control ROM 302. For this reason, if compressed image data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the drawing circuit 322 executes the drawing process, there is a risk that the processing performance will be significantly degraded.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before the drawing process is executed, the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data read speed than the CGROM 303. Then, by configuring the system so that the compressed image data is read from the DRAM 304 when the drawing process is executed, a decrease in processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, every time the preloader circuit 319 receives a display list, it transfers (preloads) one frame of compressed image data specified in the display list, from among the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303, to a preload area of the DRAM 304. At this time, the preloader circuit 319 rewrites the display list.
That is, in the display list generated by the CPU 310, an address specifying a storage area of the CGROM 303 is described as the image address included in each drawing command. Therefore, for each drawing command included in the display list, the preloader circuit 319 transfers the compressed image data stored in the storage area (storage area of the CGROM 303) specified by the image address included in the drawing command to a predetermined area of the DRAM 304, and then rewrites the image address included in the drawing command to an address specifying the storage area after transfer (the predetermined area of the DRAM 304). In this way, a new display list in which the image address has been rewritten is generated.
In this embodiment, the preloader circuit 319 is configured to transfer (preload) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304. However, the preloader circuit 319 may be configured to transfer the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a predetermined area (preload area) of the VRAM 316.
The display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 is transferred by the transfer circuit 318 to the drawing circuit 320 .

The drawing circuit 322 stores (generates and draws) one frame's worth of drawing data in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area in accordance with the display list received from the preloader circuit 319 .
Specifically, each time the drawing circuit 320 receives a display list, it reads out one frame's worth of compressed image data specified in the display list from the DRAM 304. The one frame's worth of compressed image data read out from the DRAM 304 is restored (decoded) by the graphic decoder circuit 321 and stored (expanded) in an image expansion area of the VRAM 316. Then, the drawing circuit 320 uses the image data stored in the image expansion area to generate one frame's worth of drawing data in the frame buffer area specified as the drawing area.

The display circuit 320 generates a video signal based on one frame of drawing data stored (generated and drawn) in a frame buffer area specified as an output area, and outputs the generated video signal to the image display device 31. In this embodiment, a digital RGB signal is output as the video signal. Here, a configuration in which an LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) signal is output as the video signal may also be used.
Specifically, the display circuit 320 is configured to include a data acquisition circuit (not shown), a scaler circuit (not shown), a color correction circuit (not shown), a ditherer circuit (not shown), a synchronization signal generation circuit (not shown), and the like.
The data acquisition circuit reads out the drawing data stored in the frame buffer area designated as the output area.
The scaler circuit is capable of performing scaling processing (enlargement and reduction processing) on the drawing data read out by the data acquisition circuit.

The color correction circuit is capable of performing color correction processing on the drawing data after processing by the scaler circuit.
The ditherer circuit is capable of performing dithering processing on the drawing data after processing by the color correction circuit.
Then, the drawing data processed by the dithering circuit is output as a video signal (digital RGB signal).
The synchronization signal generation circuit generates a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal (Vsync). Then, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the generated horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal to the image display device 31. In addition, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the generated vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310.
In this embodiment, the display of the effect image on the image display device 31 (display of the effect image based on one frame's worth of drawing data) is updated every 16.66 ms. Therefore, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs a vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310 (set to high level) every 16.66 ms.

The sound controller 323 controls the audio output from the various speakers 22 .
Specifically, the sound controller 323 generates an audio signal in response to receiving a sound command from the CPU 310 , and outputs the generated audio signal to the various speakers 22 .
The sound controller 323 includes an audio decoder circuit (not shown). In response to a sound command received from the CPU 310, the audio decoder circuit reads compressed audio data specified by the sound command from the DRAM 304. The audio decoder circuit also restores (decodes) the read compressed audio data. Then, based on the restored audio data, the audio signal is generated and output to the various speakers 22.

The serial communication controller 317 includes a lamp controller 317a and a motor controller 317b.
The lamp controller 317 a controls the driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21 .
Specifically, the lamp controller 317a generates lamp driving data in response to receiving a lamp command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated lamp driving data together with a clock signal to the lamp drivers 332 and 342. At this time, the lamp driving data is output as serial data.
The lamp controller 317a includes a lamp decoder circuit (not shown). In response to receiving a lamp command from the CPU 310, the lamp decoder circuit reads out compressed lamp drive data specified in the lamp command from the control ROM 302. The lamp decoder circuit also restores (decodes) the read compressed lamp drive data. Then, based on the restored lamp drive data, the lamp controller 317a generates lamp drive data and outputs the generated lamp drive data to the lamp drivers 332 and 342.

The motor controller 317b controls the driving of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Specifically, the motor controller 317b generates motor drive data in response to receiving a motor command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated motor drive data together with a clock signal to the motor drivers 333 and 343. At this time, the motor drive data is output as serial data.
The motor controller 317b includes a motor sequencer circuit (not shown). In response to receiving a motor command from the CPU 310, the motor sequencer circuit reads out compressed motor drive data specified in the motor command from the control ROM 302. The motor sequencer circuit also restores (decodes) the read compressed motor drive data. Then, based on the restored motor drive data, the motor controller 317b generates motor drive data and outputs the generated motor drive data to the motor drivers 333 and 343.
In addition, information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 is input to the motor controller 317b from the driver board 330, and information indicating the detection status of each switch 25 to 29 and information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 are input from the sub-connection board 340.

(Method of controlling performance by performance control board 300)
Next, a method for controlling the performance using the performance control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 selects the effect (effect number) to be executed in response to a control command received from the main control board 200. Then, the CPU 310 sets the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data in the effect scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.
"Performance scenario data" is information that specifies the progress of a performance. Specifically, the performance scenario data has a plurality of process data registered in chronological order. That is, the performance scenario data has a plurality of process data and information that specifies the start time (start timing) of processing based on each process data registered therein.
Each process data includes one or more pieces of command information. For example, command information specifying the start of a sub-performance (display performance, sound performance, lamp performance, or movable body performance), command information specifying the end of a sub-performance (display performance, sound performance, lamp performance, or movable body performance) (hereinafter, referred to as a "performance end command"), etc. are specified as command information.

Furthermore, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the presentation based on the presentation scenario data set in the presentation scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates the rendering scenario timer set in the rendering scenario setting area at a predetermined cycle, and determines whether or not there is any process data whose start time has arrived among the process data registered in the rendering scenario data set in the rendering scenario setting area based on the updated rendering scenario timer value. If it determines that there is any process data whose start time has arrived, it stores (memorizes) each piece of command information included in the process data in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, command information regarding the display performance (command information specifying the start of a display performance, command information specifying the end of a display performance, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area. Meanwhile, command information regarding the sound performance (command information specifying various sound performance control numbers) is stored in the sound command buffer area. Meanwhile, command information regarding the lamp performance (command information specifying the start of a lamp performance, command information specifying the end of a lamp performance, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area. Meanwhile, command information regarding the movable body performance (command information specifying the start of a movable body performance, command information specifying the end of a movable body performance, etc.) is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

(Display performance control method)
Next, a method for controlling the display performance (display) by the performance control board 300 will be described.
An animation table corresponding to each display effect (each display effect number) is stored in the control ROM 302. The animation table corresponding to each display effect is associated with display priority information corresponding to the display effect (the image constituting the display effect).
The "display priority information" is information that specifies the display priority.
"Display priority" is information that specifies the display (drawing) priority order.
When multiple display effects (displays) are executed at the same time, the display on the display screen 31a (the effect image displayed on the display screen 31a) is configured based on the multiple display effects (images related to the multiple display effects). In this case, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) that make up the display (the effect image), the display effect (image) with the higher display priority is displayed with priority over the display effect (image) with the lower display priority. In other words, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) that make up the effect image, the higher the display priority of the display effect (image) is, the higher the display priority is displayed with priority.
In other words, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) constituting the effect image, the display effect (image) with a higher display priority is displayed closer to the player than the display effect (image) with a lower display priority. In other words, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) constituting the effect image, the higher the display priority of the display effect (image) is, the closer it is displayed to the player.
As a result, if there is an overlapping portion between a display performance (image) with a higher display priority and a display performance (image) with a lower display priority among the multiple display performances (multiple images) that make up the performance image, the display performance (image) with the higher display priority is displayed preferentially for the overlapping portion.

The CPU 310 (display control unit) periodically determines whether command information is stored in the display command buffer area, and when it determines that command information is stored in the display command buffer area, analyzes each piece of command information stored in the display command buffer area and executes processing according to the analysis result.
At this time, if command information specifying the start of a display effect is stored in the display command buffer area, the animation table corresponding to the display effect number specified by the command information is read out from the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302. Then, the read animation table is set (stored and registered) in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304.
As a result, the animation table stored in the control ROM 302 is copied into the animation table setting area. Note that it is possible to set a plurality of animation tables in the animation table setting area.

The "animation table" is information (various parameters for controlling the display of images) that specifies the progress of the display performance (display of performance images) by the image display device 31. In other words, the animation table is information that specifies the movement of images.
Specifically, a predetermined number of frames of information are registered in chronological order in the animation table, and the display performance progresses by sequentially displaying images based on each frame of information in the predetermined number of frames of information registered in the animation table in the order in which they are registered.
Each frame information is a variety of parameters for controlling (executing and configuring) the display of one frame's worth of image. That is, each frame information is composed of information (image address information) specifying image data (compressed image data) used for drawing, information (display priority information) specifying the display priority of the image data (the display performance), information specifying the magnification (enlargement ratio/reduction ratio) when the image data is drawn (hereinafter referred to as "display magnification information"), information specifying the coordinates (coordinates in the frame buffer area) at which the image data is drawn (hereinafter referred to as "display coordinate information"), information specifying the transmittance (transparency/transparency/transparency) when the image data is drawn (hereinafter referred to as "transmittance information"), and the like.

Then, the CPU 310 controls the display of the effect image corresponding to each frame based on one or more animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes a command construction process, which will be described later, at a predetermined cycle.
In the command construction process, first, the sub-scenario timers corresponding to each animation data set in the display scenario setting area are updated, and then, a display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area specified in the construction area based on all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, for all animation tables set in the animation table setting area, frame information selected as a target for constructing a display list is obtained from frame information registered in each animation table, and a display list is constructed based on all the obtained frame information.
As a result, the VDP is controlled in accordance with the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area, and the display presentation (display of the presentation image by the image display device 31) is controlled.
That is, when a piece of animation data is set in the display scenario setting area, a display list is constructed that specifies the rendering of the image data specified by that piece of animation data.
On the other hand, when multiple animation data are set in the display scenario setting area, a display list is constructed that specifies that the drawing of the image data specified by the multiple animation data is to be executed in a predetermined order (sequence).
At this time, the order of drawing image data corresponding to the display priority information set in the display scenario setting area is set based on the display priority specified by the display priority information.

(Sound production control method)
Next, a method for controlling sound effects using the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (sound control unit) periodically determines whether command information is stored in the sound command buffer area. If it determines that command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, it analyzes each piece of command information stored in the sound command buffer area and executes processing according to the analysis result.
Specifically, a command list corresponding to the sound effect control number specified by the instruction information is read from the control ROM 302, and the read command list is set in the control register of the sound circuit 323. As a result, the sound circuit 323 operates according to the command list set in the control register.

(Method of controlling lamp effects)
Next, a method for controlling the lamp effects using the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 periodically determines whether command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area. If it determines that command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the CPU 310 analyzes each piece of command information stored in the lamp command buffer area and executes processing according to the analysis result.
At this time, if command information specifying the start of a lamp performance is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the compressed lamp drive data corresponding to the lamp performance number specified by the command information is read out, and the read compressed lamp drive data is set in the lamp register. As a result, the lamp controller 317a controls the lamp performance (driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20, 21) according to the compressed lamp drive data set in the lamp register.

(Method of controlling movable body effects)
Next, a method for controlling the movable body performance using the performance control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 periodically determines whether command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, and when it determines that command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, it analyzes each piece of command information stored in the movable body command buffer area and executes processing according to the analysis result.
At this time, if command information specifying the start of a moving body performance is stored in the moving body command buffer area, the compressed motor drive data specified by the command information is read out and the read compressed motor drive data is set in the motor register. As a result, the motor controller 317b controls the moving body performance (the drive of the various motors 23 (various moving bodies)) according to the compressed motor drive data set in the motor register.

(Configuration of the driver board 330)
The driver board 330 includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 , a lamp driver 332 , and a motor driver 333 .
The lamp driver 332 controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system that constitutes the panel lamp 21 in accordance with the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, the lamp drive data specifies a brightness value corresponding to each system that constitutes the panel lamp 21. An excitation signal (drive current) according to the brightness value specified in the lamp drive data is supplied to each system that constitutes the panel lamp 21. This controls the drive (light emission) of the light-emitting element group that constitutes each system.
The motor driver 333 controls the output of excitation signals (driving currents) to the various motors 23 (motors 23 that constitute the various movable body units) arranged in the game board unit 10 in accordance with the motor driving data input from the motor controller 317b.
At this time, the motor drive data specifies the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the game board unit 10. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the output value specified by the motor drive data is supplied to each motor 23. This controls the drive of each motor 23.
Detection signals from the various sensors 24 are input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit 331. Then, the parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317.

(Configuration of the sub-connection board 340)
The sub-connection board 340 is configured to include a parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 , a lamp driver 342 , and a motor driver 343 .
The lamp driver 342 controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system constituting the frame lamp 20 in accordance with the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, the lamp drive data specifies a luminance value corresponding to each system that constitutes the frame lamp 20. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) according to the luminance value specified in the lamp drive data is supplied to each system that constitutes the frame lamp 20. This controls the drive (light emission) of the light-emitting element group that constitutes each system.
The motor driver 343 controls the output of excitation signals (driving currents) to the various motors 23 (motors 23 that constitute the various movable body units) arranged in the front frame unit 4 in accordance with the motor driving data input from the motor controller 317b.
At this time, the motor drive data specifies the output value of each motor 23 disposed in the front frame unit 4. An excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the output value specified in the motor drive data is supplied to each motor 23. This controls the drive of each motor 23.
The parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 receives detection signals from the various sensors 24 and detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29. The parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 then converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317.

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six gaming machine states are defined (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state).
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine state flag area, a value corresponding to one of six gaming machine states (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state) is stored (set) as a gaming machine state flag. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.

The "playable state" is a state of the gaming machine in which game progress is possible.
During the playable state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is permitted, which allows the game (normal game and special game) to proceed.
During the playable state, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206. Also, information related to the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The "setting change state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state occurs when the setting change conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting change conditions are met when a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is input from the RAM clear switch 207 when the power is turned on. In other words, when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is turned to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, when the power is turned on, the setting change state occurs.
During the setting change state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
Furthermore, while the setting change state is occurring, it is possible to change the setting values stored in the setting value area by pressing the RAM clear switch 207. Then, when the key switch 208 is turned to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced by a playable state, whereby the setting values stored in the setting value area are confirmed.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which it is possible to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230.
The setting confirmation state occurs when the setting confirmation conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting confirmation conditions are met when a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is not input from the RAM clear switch 207 when the power is turned on. In other words, the setting confirmation state occurs when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is turned to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed when the power is turned on.
During the setting confirmation state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. This makes it possible to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value area. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
It should be noted that while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area cannot be changed.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting confirmation state is replaced with a playable state.

The "setting abnormality state" refers to the state of the gaming machine in which a setting abnormality has occurred.
The setting abnormal state occurs when, during a playable state, it is determined that the setting value set in the setting value area is not within a specified range.
During the occurrence of the setting abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, when a setting abnormality occurs, an error code designating the occurrence of a setting abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from the abnormal setting state, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" refers to the state of the gaming machine in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the RAM abnormal state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described below is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the occurrence of a RAM abnormality, an error code designating the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from a RAM abnormality, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

The "backup abnormality state" is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality (specifically, an abnormality in the backup flag or an abnormality in the checksum) has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the backup abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described below is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, when a backup abnormality occurs, an error code designating the occurrence of a backup abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to perform a power off and power on to cause a setting change state.

(Regarding setting values)
Next, the setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "set value" is information that specifies the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery) (the probability of winning the "jackpot"). In this embodiment, the set value is specified to be a value from "0" to "5".
A set value area is provided in the RAM 230 of the main control board 200. In the set value area, one of the values "0" to "5" is stored (set) as a set value. In the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is set according to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery corresponding to each setting value is, in order from highest to lowest, the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "5", the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "4", the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "3", the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "2", the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "1", and the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "0" (high winning probability → low winning probability).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting value stored in the setting value area during the setting change state. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the manager of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the game center where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state is generated.
When the setting change state occurs, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting value stored in the setting value area is changed. At this time, if the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced with a playable state, whereby the setting value stored in the setting value area is confirmed.

(Base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, while a playable state occurs, a base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only while a predetermined play state occurs (specifically, while a special low probability state occurs and while time-saving control is stopped).
During the playable state, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
The "base ratio" is information calculated based on the number of game balls shot into the game area 30 and the number of prize balls paid out in response to the game balls entering predetermined entry ports (in this embodiment, the first start port 51, the second start port 52, and the other prize entry ports 55a to 55e). Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of paid out balls to the number of out balls.
In this embodiment, the base ratio for each predetermined interval (period) is calculated. As the predetermined interval, a interval is defined in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 balls in this embodiment) are detected (discharged). That is, each interval is started in response to the end of the previous interval, and is ended in response to the number of out balls detected during the current interval reaching the predetermined number (60,000 balls). The CPU 210 then calculates the base ratio as needed (in real time) during each interval.

Note that a predetermined period of time may be defined as the predetermined interval. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined period of time.
The "number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. An "out ball" refers to a game ball that has been discharged from the game area 30. Specifically, an out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
The game ball discharged from the outlet 58 may be regarded as the out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the outlet 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be regarded as the out ball.
"Number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls entering the first starting hole 51, the second starting hole 52 and the other winning holes 55a to 55e.

(Regarding time-saving control)
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
While the time-saving control is being executed, it becomes easier to get the game ball into the second starting hole 52 (to obtain special chart 2 game information) compared to when the time-saving control is stopped, which is advantageous for the player.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning the "normal winning" by the normal symbol lottery is the same during the execution of the time-saving control and during the stop of the time-saving control. Note that the probability of winning the "normal winning" by the normal symbol lottery may be increased during the execution of the time-saving control compared to when the time-saving control is stopped.
In particular, the time for displaying the special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "variation time") is shortened during execution of the time-saving control compared to when the time-saving control is stopped. Also, the time for displaying the normal symbol variation is shortened during execution of the time-saving control compared to when the time-saving control is stopped. Furthermore, during execution of the time-saving control, the number of times the normal electric device 52a is opened is increased and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a is extended in the normal symbol winning game state compared to when the time-saving control is stopped. As a result, during execution of the time-saving control, it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 52 (to obtain special symbol 2 game information) compared to when the time-saving control is stopped.

(Regarding various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a regular symbol lottery is executed when a game ball enters the operation port 54.
In this embodiment, the results of the normal symbol lottery are defined as "normal symbol hit" and "miss." Regardless of whether the time-saving control is being executed or stopped, the probability of being determined as "normal symbol hit" (winning) by the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit/loss judgment) is 65535/65536.
In addition, in this embodiment, one type of normal symbol winning game state that occurs when the normal symbol lottery is won is set to "normal symbol winning".
When the "regular winning" is won (the regular pattern lottery is won), the regular pattern display device is controlled to stop and display the regular pattern at the "regular winning pattern".
On the other hand, if the player loses the regular symbol lottery, the regular symbol display device is controlled to stop and display the regular symbol as a "losing symbol."

When the "normal winning" is won, a normal winning game state is generated. In the normal winning game state, the normal electric device 52a is displaced (opened) from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the second starting hole 52.
In the normal winning game state, the number of times the normal electric device 52a opens is set to 1 [time] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a each time is set to 0.04 [s] or 1.0 [s].
At this time, while the time-saving control is being executed, the number of times that the normal electric device 52a is opened is set to 3 times, and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a for each opening is set to 1.0 seconds.
On the other hand, while the time-saving control is stopped, the number of times the normal electric device 52a is opened is set to 1 [time], and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a for each opening is set to 0.04 [s].

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a first special pattern lottery is executed when a game ball enters the first starting hole 51, and a second special pattern lottery is executed when a game ball enters the second starting hole 52.
In this embodiment, the results of the first special symbol selection are defined as "big win" and "loss". On the other hand, the results of the second special symbol selection are defined as "big win", "small win", and "loss".
In addition, a configuration in which a "small win" is specified as a result of the first special symbol lottery may be used. In particular, a configuration in which a "small win (without V)" is included as a winning type (a type of "small win pattern") selected when a "small win" is won by the first special symbol lottery may be used. Here, the "small win (without V)" is a winning type in which it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of a small win game state.

In each of the first special pattern lottery (determination of whether a special pattern has been won based on special pattern 1 game information) and the second special pattern lottery (determination of whether a special pattern has been won based on special pattern 2 game information), the probability of winning a "jackpot" is determined according to a set value.
In this case, when the setting value is "0", the probability of winning a "jackpot" through a special pattern drawing (first special pattern drawing or second special pattern drawing) is 1/199. On the other hand, when the setting value is "1", the probability of winning a "jackpot" through a special pattern drawing (first special pattern drawing or second special pattern drawing) is 1/195. On the other hand, when the setting value is "2", the probability of winning a "jackpot" through a special pattern drawing (first special pattern drawing or second special pattern drawing) is 1/191. On the other hand, when the setting value is "3", the probability of winning a "jackpot" through a special pattern drawing (first special pattern drawing or second special pattern drawing) is 1/187. On the other hand, when the setting value is "4", the probability of winning the "jackpot" through the special pattern drawing (first special pattern drawing or second special pattern drawing) is 1/171. On the other hand, when the setting value is "5", the probability of winning the "jackpot" through the special pattern drawing (first special pattern drawing or second special pattern drawing) is 1/140.
In the second special pattern lottery (determination of whether a special pattern is a hit based on the special pattern 2 game information), the probability of winning a "small hit" is 1/7.7 regardless of the set value.

In addition, in this embodiment, "Jackpot 1" and "Jackpot 2"("Jackpot pattern 1" and "Jackpot pattern 2") are specified as the winning types (types of "jackpot pattern") that are selected when a "jackpot" is won by the first special pattern lottery.
If a "jackpot" is won through the first special pattern lottery, the probability that "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") will be selected is 99/100, and the probability that "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2") will be selected is 1/100.
On the other hand, "Jackpot 3"("Jackpot pattern 3") is specified as the winning type (type of "jackpot pattern") to be selected when a "jackpot" is won by the second special pattern lottery.
If a "jackpot" is won through the second special symbol lottery, the probability that "jackpot 3"("jackpot symbol 3") will be selected is 1/1.
On the other hand, the winning types (types of "small win patterns") to be selected when a "small win" is won by the second special pattern lottery are specified as "small win 1,""small win 2," and "small win 3"("small win pattern 1,""small win pattern 2," and "small win pattern 3").
If a "small win" is won in the second special pattern lottery, the probability that "small win 1"("small win pattern 1") will be selected is 25/100, the probability that "small win 2"("small win pattern 2") will be selected is 20/100, and the probability that "small win 3"("small win pattern 3") will be selected is 55/100.

When "jackpot 1" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "jackpot pattern 1" is stopped and displayed on the special chart 1 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "challenge pattern" is stopped and displayed in the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
Here, the "challenge symbol" is a stop symbol that suggests a transition to a "challenge section" described later. The "challenge symbol" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 are aligned with the "number symbol" showing the same even numbers such as "2, 2, 2", and the second performance symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance symbol display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When "Big Win 2" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "Big Win Pattern 2" is displayed on the special chart 1 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "Super Rush Pattern" is displayed on the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
Here, the "Super Rush symbol" is a stop symbol that indicates a transition to a "Super Rush section" described later. The "Super Rush symbol" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 are aligned with "number symbols" showing the same odd numbers such as "1, 1, 1", and the second performance symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance symbol display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When "Big Win 3" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "Big Win Pattern 3" is displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "Super Rush Pattern" is displayed on the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.

When "small win 1" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "small win pattern 1" is stopped and displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "rush pattern 1" is stopped and displayed in the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
Here, "rush pattern 1" is a display mode in which, for example, the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 are all "number patterns" showing the same even numbers, such as "2, 2, 2," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When "small win 2" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "small win pattern 2" is stopped and displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "rush pattern 2" is stopped and displayed in the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
Here, the "rush pattern 2" is a display mode in which, for example, the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 are all "number patterns" showing the same even numbers, such as "4, 4, 4," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When "small win 3" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "small win pattern 3" is stopped and displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "rush pattern 3" is stopped and displayed in the performance pattern display area a1 to a4.
Here, "rush pattern 3" is a display mode in which, for example, the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 are all "number patterns" showing the same even numbers, such as "6, 6, 6," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.

In the case where the player loses the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) (in the case of a "lose"), the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lose symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device or the special symbol 2 display device. Also, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lose symbol" is stopped and displayed on the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4.
A "losing pattern" is, for example, a combination in which at least one of the first performance patterns z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 displays identification information different from that of the other first performance patterns z1, and a display mode in which the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.

When "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 3"("jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 3") are won, a jackpot game state is generated. In the jackpot game state, the special electric device 53a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the big prize opening 53.
Specifically, during the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, a predetermined number of rounds of gaming are executed.
In this embodiment, if "Jackpot 1" or "Jackpot 2" is won, the number of rounds of play is set to 5, and if "Jackpot 3" is won, the number of rounds of play is set to 2.
In addition, if one of "Jackpot 1" to "Jackpot 3" is won, the maximum opening time of the special electric device 53a in each round of play is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Each round of play is ended when one of the following conditions is met: (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric device 53a was opened, and (2) the number of game balls entering the large prize opening 53 during the execution of that round of play has reached a predetermined upper limit (8 balls in this embodiment).

When "small win 1" to "small win 3"("small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 3") are won, a small win game state is generated. In the small win game state, the special electric device 53a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the large winning hole 53.
Specifically, during the occurrence of a small win gaming state, a predetermined number of small win games are executed.
In this embodiment, when "small win 1" to "small win 3" are won, the number of small win games is set to 1 [time].
In addition, if the player wins "Small Win 1" to "Small Win 3," the maximum opening time of the special electric device 53a in each small win game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Each small win game is ended when one of the following conditions is met: (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric device 53a was opened, and (2) the number of game balls entering the large prize opening 53 during the small win game has reached a predetermined upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment).
In addition, in each small win game, the distribution means is shifted from a non-V passing state to a V passing state. At this time, in each small win game, the distribution means is shifted from a non-V passing state to a V passing state in such a manner that the game ball that entered the large winning opening 53 during the execution of the small win game can easily (possibly) pass through the V area. As a result, when "small win 1" to "small win 3" are won, the game ball can easily (possibly) pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state.

If the passage of a game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of a small win game state (if the passage of a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 53 during the execution of a small win game is detected through the V area), a large win game state is generated in response to the end of the small win game state.
In this case, if "small win 1" is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the number of round games is set to 9. As a result, 10 rounds will be played, with the small win game being the first round game.
On the other hand, if the "small win 2" is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, the number of rounds is set to 6. As a result, 7 rounds will be played, with the small win game being the first round.
On the other hand, if the "small win 3" is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, the number of rounds is set to 3. As a result, the small win game is regarded as the first round game, and 4 rounds are played.
In addition, when "Small Win 1" to "Small Win 3" are won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, the maximum opening time of the special electric device 53a in each round of play is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Each round of play is ended when one of the following conditions is met: (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric device 53a was opened, and (2) the number of game balls entering the large prize opening 53 during the execution of that round of play has reached a predetermined upper limit (8 balls in this embodiment).
On the other hand, if the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of a small win game state (if the passage of the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 53 during the execution of a small win game is not detected), a large win game state is not generated.

When "Big Win 1" to "Big Win 3" are won, time-saving control is started in response to the end of the big win gaming state. Also, when "Small Win 1" to "Small Win 3" are won and the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win gaming state, time-saving control is started in response to the end of the big win gaming state.
In this embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions (specifically, "time-saving end condition 1" to "time-saving end condition 4") are stipulated as end conditions for the time-saving control (hereinafter, "time-saving end conditions"). In particular, as the time-saving end conditions, a time-saving end condition related to variable play (the number of variable plays) (specifically, "time-saving end condition 1" and "time-saving end condition 2") and a time-saving end condition related to a "small win" (the result of the special win determination) (specifically, "time-saving end condition 3") are stipulated. Then, after the start of the time-saving control, the time-saving control is ended according to the establishment of any one of the time-saving end conditions "time-saving end condition 1" to "time-saving end condition 4".

The "time-saving end condition 1" is a time-saving end condition based on the variable play related to the special chart 2 game information. Specifically, the "time-saving end condition 1" is a time-saving end condition based on the number of variable plays related to the special chart 2 game information.
The "variable game based on the special game information 2" is a variable display of the second special symbol. The "variable game based on the special game information 2" may be a notification display (variable display and stop display) of the second special symbol.
On the other hand, the "variable game based on the special game information 1" described later is a variable display of the first special symbol. The "variable game based on the special game information 1" may be a notification display (variable display and stop display) of the first special symbol.
In this embodiment, the "time-saving end condition 1" is met when the number of times that the special chart 2 changes during the time-saving period reaches the first time-saving number of times that was set at the end of the jackpot game state.

"Number of times special chart 2 is changed during time-saving control" is the number of times variable play is performed based on special chart 2 game information executed during time-saving control.
In this embodiment, when "time-saving termination condition 1" is satisfied, the time-saving control is terminated at the end of the variable display of the second special pattern that triggered the satisfaction of the time-saving termination condition (at the end/elapse of the variable time).
In other words, when "time-saving termination condition 1" is satisfied, the time-saving control is terminated at the start of the stopped display of the second special pattern that triggered the satisfaction of the time-saving termination condition (at the time the stop time is set/started).
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a first time-saving counter that counts the number of times the special symbol 2 changes during the time-saving period. At the end of the big win game state, the CPU 210 sets the value of the first time-saving counter to the first number of times the time-saving period corresponds to the type of winning (the type of the winning symbol). In addition, each time the variable display of the second special symbol ends, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time-saving counter. Then, when the value of the first time-saving counter is subtracted to "0", it is determined that "time-saving end condition 1" is satisfied, and the time-saving control is stopped.

The "time-saving end condition 2" is a time-saving end condition based on the variable play related to the special chart 1 game information and the variable play related to the special chart 2 game information. Specifically, the "time-saving end condition 2" is a time-saving end condition based on the total number of times of the variable play related to the special chart 1 game information and the variable play related to the special chart 2 game information.
In this embodiment, the "time-saving end condition 2" is met when the total number of times the special chart changes during the time-saving period reaches the second time-saving number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state.
The "total number of times that special charts changed during time-saving control" is the total number of times that variable play was performed based on special chart 1 game information and the number of times that variable play was performed based on special chart 2 game information during time-saving control.
In this embodiment, when "time-saving end condition 2" is satisfied, the time-saving control is terminated at the end of the varying display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) that triggered the satisfaction of the time-saving end condition (when the varying time has elapsed/ended).
In other words, when "time-saving termination condition 2" is satisfied, the time-saving control is terminated at the start of the stopped display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) that triggered the satisfaction of the time-saving termination condition (when the stop time is set/starts).
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a second time-saving counter that counts the total number of times the special symbols change during the time-saving mode. At the end of the big win game state, the CPU 210 sets the value of the second time-saving counter to the second number of times the special symbols change according to the type of winning (the type of symbol that has been won). In addition, each time the display of the special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time-saving counter. Then, when the value of the second time-saving counter is subtracted to "0", it is determined that "time-saving end condition 2" is met, and the time-saving control is stopped.

The "time-saving end condition 3" is a time-saving end condition based on a "small win" (the result of the special winning judgment). Specifically, the "time-saving end condition 3" is a time-saving end condition based on the number of times the "small win" is won (or the number of variable games related to the "small win").
In this embodiment, the "time-saving end condition 3" is met when the number of fluctuations in the small/medium time-saving hits reaches the third time-saving number of times set at the end of the big hit gaming state.
The "number of small and medium-sized winning variations during time-saving control" is the number of small winning variation games executed during time-saving control. Here, the "small winning variation game" is a variation game executed when a "small winning" is won by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery).
In this embodiment, when "Time-saving termination condition 3" is met, the time-saving control is terminated at the end of the variable display of the second special pattern related to the "small hit" that triggered the time-saving termination condition to be met (at the end of the variable time).
In other words, when "Time-saving End Condition 3" is satisfied, the time-saving control is terminated at the start of the stopped display of the second special pattern related to the "small hit" that triggered the satisfaction of the time-saving end condition (at the time the stop time is set/started).
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a third time-saving counter that counts the number of times the time-saving medium/small wins change. At the end of the big win game state, the CPU 210 sets a predetermined number of times the time-saving is performed as the value of the third time-saving counter. Also, each time the variable display of the second special symbol related to the "small win" ends, "1" is subtracted from the value of the third time-saving counter. Then, when the value of the third time-saving counter is subtracted to "0", it is determined that "time-saving end condition 3" is established, and the time-saving control is stopped.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the predetermined third time-saving number of times is set to 1 [times]. As a result, when a "small win" is won by the special symbol lottery (the second special symbol lottery in this embodiment) executed during the execution of the time-saving control, the time-saving control is ended in response to the end of the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol lottery.
Therefore, when a player wins a winning type that is disadvantageous to the player among "Small Win 1" to "Small Win 3" (for example, a winning type with a small number of rounds, a winning type with a small number of time reductions (first time reductions and second time reductions)), it is possible to prevent the player from intentionally not causing the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state related to that winning type, and waiting to win a more advantageous winning type.

"Time-saving end condition 4" is a condition based on winning a "jackpot" (jackpot gaming state).
In this embodiment, the "time-saving end condition 4" is met when a "jackpot" is won (when a jackpot gaming state occurs).
In this embodiment, if the "time-saving end condition 4" is met, the time-saving control is ended when the stopped display of the "jackpot pattern" ends (when the stopped time has elapsed/ended).
In other words, if "time-saving end condition 4" is met, the time-saving control is ended at the start of the jackpot gaming state (when the opening time is set/started).

In this embodiment, the first time-saving number and the second time-saving number are set to different numbers according to the winning type (the type of the winning pattern), and the third time-saving number is set to the same number regardless of the winning type (the type of the winning pattern). Note that the third time-saving number may also be set to a different number according to the winning type (the type of the winning pattern).
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 6(a), when "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") is won, the first number of time-saving times is set to 1 [time] or 12 [times] at the end of the jackpot game state. In this case, if the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed is one in which the time-saving control is stopped, the first number of time-saving times is set to 1 [time], and if the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed is one in which the time-saving control is being executed, the first number of time-saving times is set to 12 [times].
In addition, when "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") is won, the second time-saving number of times is set to 5 [times] or 16 [times] at the end of the jackpot game state. In this case, if the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed is during the stop of the time-saving control, the second time-saving number of times is set to 5 [times], and if the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed is during the time-saving control, the second time-saving number of times is set to 16 [times].
Furthermore, if "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") is won, regardless of the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed, at the end of the jackpot game state, the third time reduction number of times is set to 1 [times].

On the other hand, if "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2") is won, the first time-saving number of times is set to 100 [times] or 12 [times] at the end of the jackpot game state. In this case, if the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed is during the time-saving control, the first time-saving number of times is set to 100 [times], and if the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed is during the time-saving control, the first time-saving number of times is set to 12 [times].
In addition, when "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2") is won, the second time-saving number of times is set to 100 [times] or 16 [times] at the end of the jackpot game state. In this case, if the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed is during the time-saving control is stopped, the second time-saving number of times is set to 100 [times], and if the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed is during the time-saving control, the second time-saving number of times is set to 16 [times].
Furthermore, if "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2") is won, regardless of the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed, the third time reduction number of times is set to 1 [time] at the end of the jackpot game state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(b), in the case where "jackpot 3"("jackpot pattern 3") is won, regardless of the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed, the first time reduction number of times is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot game state.
In addition, if "jackpot 3"("jackpot pattern 3") is won, regardless of the game state when the special pattern hit judgment is executed, the second time reduction number of times is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot game state.
Furthermore, if "jackpot 3"("jackpot pattern 3") is won, regardless of the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed, at the end of the jackpot game state, the third time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time].

On the other hand, if a "small win 1"("small win pattern 1") to "small win 3"("small win pattern 3") is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, the first time reduction number of times is set to 12 at the end of the big win game state, regardless of the game state when the special pattern hit judgment is executed.
In addition, if a "small win 1"("small win pattern 1") to "small win 3"("small win pattern 3") is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, the second time reduction number of times is set to 16 at the end of the big win game state, regardless of the game state when the special pattern hit judgment is executed.
Furthermore, if a "small win 1"("small win pattern 1") to "small win 3"("small win pattern 3") is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, the third time reduction count is set to 1 [time] at the end of the big win game state, regardless of the game state when the special pattern hit determination is executed.
Here, in this embodiment, when a "small win" is won, the first time-saving number of times, the second time-saving number of times, and the third time-saving number of times are set to the same number regardless of the winning type (the type of the winning pattern). However, when a "small win" is won, the first time-saving number of times, the second time-saving number of times, and the third time-saving number of times may be set to different numbers depending on the winning type (the type of the winning pattern).

As described above, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the first number of time-saving times, the second number of time-saving times, and the third number of time-saving times are set, and time-saving control is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state.
Then, the time-saving control is terminated depending on the establishment of any one of the following time-saving termination conditions: (1) the number of times that the special chart 2 during the time-saving period has changed has reached the first time-saving number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state ("time-saving termination condition 1"); (2) the total number of times that the special chart 2 during the time-saving period has changed has reached the second time-saving number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state ("time-saving termination condition 2"); (3) the number of times that the small/medium time-saving period has changed has reached the third time-saving number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state ("time-saving termination condition 3"); or (4) a "jackpot" has been won ("time-saving termination condition 4").

(Regarding control commands)
Next, we will explain the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and the control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and communication from the performance control board 300 to the main control board 200 is not performed.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 is composed of one byte of high-order data indicating the type of control command and one byte of low-order data indicating the content of the control command.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command consisting of upper data and lower data to the performance control board 300 by serial communication. When the performance control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 include a pattern type designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game status designation command, a number of reserved balls designation command, an opening designation command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a V winning designation command, a first look-ahead designation command, a second look-ahead designation command, an error designation command, a demo designation command, and the like.
The symbol type designation command is a command that designates the type of the stopping symbol (stopping symbol number). Specifically, the symbol type designation command designates one of the following types: "miss symbol,""small win symbol"("small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 3"), and "jackpot symbol"("jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 3"). The symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the symbol type designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The variation pattern designation command is a command that designates the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number). The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by designating the variation pattern number. The variation pattern designation command is sent at the start of the variation display of the special pattern.
The stop command is a command that specifies the stop display of the special symbols (effect symbols z1 and z2). The stop command is transmitted at the start of the stop display of the special symbols.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information that specifies the game state. In this embodiment, the game state offset value is set to a value corresponding to each combination of the time-saving control flag value, the previous jackpot symbol flag value, and the post-jackpot spin counter value.
The gaming state designation command designates one gaming state offset value. The gaming state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when a special gaming phase (described later) is changed, and the like.

The reserved number designation command is a command to designate the reserved number. In this embodiment, the reserved number designation command designates that the reserved number (special drawing 1 reserved number or special drawing 2 reserved number) has increased by "1", that the reserved number has decreased by "1", or the reserved number, etc.
Here, the "number of reserved special symbols 1" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable and stop displays) of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device. Also, the "number of reserved special symbols 2" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable and stop displays) of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 display device.
The reserved number designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when game information is stored, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, etc. In this embodiment, the reserved number designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of a small win gaming state or a big win gaming state). The opening designation command designates the type of the small win gaming state or the big win gaming state (type of "small win pattern" or "big win pattern"). Specifically, the opening designation command designates one type from "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 3" and "big win pattern 1" to "big win pattern 3". The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of a small win gaming state or a big win gaming state).
The round start designation command is a command that designates the start of a round (small win game or round game). The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a round (small win game or round game).
The round end designation command is a command that designates the end of a round (small win game or round game). The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of a round (small win game or round game).
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of an ending period, and is transmitted at the start of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command that designates the passage of the gaming ball through the V area. The V winning designation command is transmitted when the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is detected.

The first read-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the variation mode. Specifically, the first read-ahead designation command designates that the type of the variation mode is indefinite ("indefinite value"), or designates one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) ("variation mode m"). The first read-ahead designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
In this embodiment, the first pre-reading designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery.
The second look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the second look-ahead designation command designates that the type of the fluctuation pattern is indefinite ("indefinite value"), or designates one of n types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern number) ("fluctuation pattern n"). The second look-ahead designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
In this embodiment, the second pre-reading designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery.
The error designation command is a command that designates the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error designation command designates the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, or a right-stroke error. The error designation command is transmitted when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo designation command is a command that designates the start of a customer waiting state. The demo designation command is transmitted at the start of a customer waiting state.

The main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 is performed bidirectionally. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the dispensing control board 400 by serial communication. When the dispensing control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the data of the control command to be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. Also, the dispensing control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the dispensing control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the data of the control command to be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230.

In the pachinko machine 1, a command to specify the number of winning balls, etc., is set as a control command to be sent from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The number of prize balls designation command is a command that designates the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls designation command designates the payout of n prize balls (n=1 to 15). The number of prize balls designation command is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the payout operation of the prize balls.
In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 are set to specify the occurrence and release of a payout error, the occurrence and release of a full tank error, the occurrence and release of a ball jam error, etc. Each control command is transmitted when the occurrence and release of various errors are detected.

(Processing Executed on Main Control Board 200)
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the random number generating circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, the values of the first loop counter to the third loop counter are updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]).

In addition, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 2.666 [μs]).
Then, the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number are updated by the hard random number update process. Note that the hard random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generating circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 start a control command transmission process that transmits the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400. Note that the control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, a game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on a program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in Fig. 31. The CPU initialization process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the CPU initialization process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings required for executing various processes, such as register settings, are performed.

In addition, in the initial setting process, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 are read.
Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the RAM clear switch 207 has occurred. The determination result is then stored as switch information for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value indicating that the ON state has occurred (in this embodiment, "1") is stored as the switch information, and if it is determined that the ON state has not occurred, a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred (in this embodiment, "0") is stored as the switch information.

In addition, the value set in the receiving storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether or not the ON state has occurred for the setting key switch 208. The determination result is then stored as switch information for the setting key switch 208. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value indicating that the ON state has occurred (in this embodiment, "1") is stored as the switch information, and if it is determined that the ON state has not occurred, a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred (in this embodiment, "0") is stored as the switch information.
Furthermore, the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether or not the inner frame open sensor 108 is in an ON state. If it is determined that the ON state is not occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring (in this embodiment, "0"). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state is occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, a wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in a timer counter. This starts measuring the set wait processing time by the timer counter.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.

In step S1-4, a RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, the process required to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in a RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 becomes permitted.

In step S1-5, a gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, a gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) into the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether the backup valid flag is normal or not. If it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-7. If it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of RAM 230 is a specified valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be normal, and if the value stored in the backup valid flag area is not the specified valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-7, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal or not. If it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if both of the following conditions are met: "The checksum value of used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be normal.
On the other hand, if at least one of the following conditions is not met: "The checksum value of used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-9, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on, the area other than the setting value area and the game machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area) is set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state. If it is determined that the on state is not occurring (No), the process proceeds to step S1-11. If it is determined that the on state is occurring (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the on state has occurred for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if a value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the on state has occurred, and if a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the on state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether the setting confirmation condition is met, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not met (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is met when a playable state has occurred, and the on state of the RAM clear switch 207 has not occurred, and the on state of the setting key switch 208 has occurred, and the on state of the inner frame open sensor 108 has occurred.
Here, in step S1-1, if the on state has not occurred for the inner frame open sensor 108, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the on state has not occurred. As a result, if the on state has occurred for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has occurred is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, if the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting check state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1- 14. In the setting check state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value check state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored, the setting value area, the game machine status flag area, the normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error related area, and the normal game related area 1) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.
In step S1-15, power recovery initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the power recovery initialization processing, the range set in step S1-14 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-16, a subcommand transmission process upon power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the subcommand transmission process upon power recovery, a subcommand (power recovery designation command) for designating that the power has been restored from power interruption is stored in a subcommand output request buffer in the RAM 230.
In step S1-17, a dispensing command transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the dispensing command transmission process when the power is restored, a dispensing command specifying that the power has been restored from a power interruption is stored in a dispensing command output request buffer in the RAM 230.

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, an unused area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the unused area read/write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is executed.
In step S1-20, an abnormality clearing target area setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clearing target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the set value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the use area M1 of the RAM 230.
In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range of used area M1 of RAM 230 set in step S1-20 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is executed.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether the results of the read/write checks performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 are normal or not. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-23. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, a RAM abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether a setting confirmation state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-25, and if it is determined that a setting confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, a playable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the playable state setting process, a value corresponding to a playable state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether the setting change condition is met, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is not met (No), the process proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is met when the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state, the setting key switch 208 is in an on state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in an on state.
Here, as described above, when an on state occurs for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that an on state occurs is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, when an on state does not occur for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that an on state does not occur is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change conditions are met based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 stored in step S1-1.
At this time, if values indicating that an ON state has occurred are stored for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is met. On the other hand, if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored for at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is not met.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, a gaming machine status flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (RAM clear designation command) designating that the RAM has been cleared is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-30, a RAM clear initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization process, the range of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 that was set in step S1-9 or step S1-20 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when the RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when the RAM is cleared, a payout command specifying that the RAM has been cleared is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-32, a sub-command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the sub-command setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the current gaming machine state is stored in a sub-command output request buffer in the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the sub-command setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of RAM 230 is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S1-33, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in the RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand specifying the phase when power is restored, a subcommand specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand specifying the launch position, a subcommand specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a setting value specification command specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, etc.

In step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in an initial display timer.
In step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the main loop process.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in Fig. 31 ends, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in Fig. 32. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process starts, the process first proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating initial value random numbers is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number used to determine the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (winning pattern random numbers, variable pattern random numbers, etc.), which are random numbers generated on a program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and the end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, a main command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the dispensing control board 400 (the control command transmitted from the dispensing control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and a process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, a subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the sub-commands input to the transmission data register are stored in the FIFO buffer. The sub-commands stored in the FIFO buffer are then transmitted to the performance control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. As a result, the period from when the interrupt permission process in step S2-5 is executed until when the interrupt prohibition process in step S2-1 is executed becomes an interrupt permission period in which the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like is permitted.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update processing, software random numbers other than winning symbol random numbers (specifically, variable pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation process when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the save process at the time of power interruption.
The main control board 200 is configured to include a power interruption detection circuit (not shown). The power interruption detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600, and outputs a power interruption warning signal to the input port 204 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power cutoff warning signal, it starts the power cutoff save process shown in Fig. 33 during the interruption permission period of the main loop process. The power cutoff save process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the power cutoff save process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the power interruption save process is started, the process first proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the values of the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cut-off warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cut-off warning signal has been input from the power cut-off detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, an output port stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop process, the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stopping process, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) are initialized, which stops the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4).
In step S3-5, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is saved in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, a checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum saving process, a checksum is first calculated based on the information stored in used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area of RAM 230.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, a RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in a RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times the power cutoff notice signal has been read is set as the value of the loop counter for recovery determination.
In step S3-9, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cut-off warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cut-off warning signal has been input from the power cut-off detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12, in which "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the CPU initialization process (step S1-1). If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register restore process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restore process, the register values saved in step S3-1 are restored. After the register restore process is terminated, the process returns to the main loop process (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
The clock generating circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal at a predetermined interrupt period (4.0 ms in this embodiment).
In response to the occurrence of an interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts a timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 34 during an interrupt permitted period of the main loop process. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the process first proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, an interrupt is permitted.
In step S4-3, a dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4, which will be described later.

In step S4-4, a port input process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input process, the state of each switch/sensor (each signal) is obtained.
The RAM 230 is provided with an input information storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), and an on state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, first, for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), the information set in the receiving memory area corresponding to that switch/sensor is obtained, and the obtained information is saved (stored) in the input information memory area corresponding to that switch/sensor.
As a result, for each switch sensor, when a detection signal is input from that switch sensor (high level), a "1" is stored in the input information memory area corresponding to that switch sensor, and when a detection signal is not input from that switch sensor (low level), a "0" is stored in the input memory area corresponding to that switch sensor.

Next, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3). At this time, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor based on the value stored in the input information storage area in the previous port input process and the value stored in the input information storage area in the current port input process.
The "on state" refers to a state in which a detection signal has changed from a state in which no detection signal is being input (low level) to a state in which a detection signal is being input (high level).
When it is determined that an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor, a "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that an ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, a "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor is referred to as the "switch bit data" of that switch/sensor.
In particular, the input port 1 is provided with a receiving memory area corresponding to the handle detection signal input from the launch enabling condition detection unit 422. Then, in the port input process, information set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the handle detection signal of the input port 1 is acquired, and the acquired information is saved (stored) in the input information memory area corresponding to the handle detection signal.

In step S4-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine state flag acquisition process, the gaming machine state flag stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the acquired gaming machine state flag does not have a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether an abnormal condition has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred based on the gaming machine status flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired gaming machine status flag is not a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, a setting-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19, which will be described later.
In step S4-9, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, the timer update process updates the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.).
In step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating an initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating a winning symbol random number among software random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, a switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management process, processes (such as obtaining various random numbers) are executed according to the state (whether or not the ON state is detected) of each of the switches 101, 102, 104, and 110. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special image display device and the operation of the special electric role object 53a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal map display device and the operation of the normal electric role object 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.

In step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, the occurrence and release of various errors (abnormal states) are monitored. Then, when the occurrence and release of various errors is detected, various settings (setting of subcommands, etc.) are executed.
In addition, in the state management process, it is determined whether or not the handle detection signal has changed from a state where it is not input to a state where it is input, based on the value stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal (the value stored in the previous timer interrupt process and the value stored in the current timer interrupt process). Then, when it is determined that the handle detection signal has changed from a state where it is not input to a state where it is input, a game status designation command that designates the occurrence of a state where it is possible to fire is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Furthermore, in the state management process, based on the value stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal (the value stored in the previous timer interrupt process and the value stored in the current timer interrupt process), it is determined whether the handle detection signal has changed from an input state to an input state. Then, when it is determined that the handle detection signal has changed from an input state to an input state, a game status designation command that designates the release of the launch-enabled state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S4-16, a prize opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the prize opening switch process, a process (such as updating various counters) is executed according to the state of each switch 101 to 104, 106 (whether or not the switch is on).
In this embodiment, the prize ball control counters include prize ball control counter 1 in which the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 51 is stored, prize ball control counter 2 in which the number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 52 is stored, prize ball control counter 3 in which the number of game balls that have entered the large prize port 53 is stored, prize ball control counter 4 in which the number of game balls that have entered the operating port 54 is stored, and prize ball control counter 5 in which the number of game balls that have entered the other prize ports 55a to 55e is stored.
In the winning port switch processing, it is determined whether or not an on state has been detected for each switch 101 to 104, 106, and if it is determined that an on state has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the prize ball control counter 1 to 5 corresponding to that switch.

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
Specifically, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, when the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command specifying the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, in response to receiving the main command specifying the completion of the payout, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (14 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the launch position designation management process, a process related to the designation of the launch position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from a left hit state (a state designating the launch of the game ball to the left path) to a right hit state (a state designating the launch of the game ball to the right path), the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "1", and a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, when changing from the right-hand hitting state to the left-hand hitting state (such as when the time-saving control ends), the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "0", and a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the left path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the left path is transmitted to the performance control board 300.

In step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signals) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (electronic device such as a hall computer or data display device) includes information on the number of times a pattern has been determined, information on the starting port, information on a jackpot, security information, information on the number of payouts from the out port, information on error occurrence, etc.
The "symbol determination count information" is external information related to the number of times the special symbol lottery (variable display and stop display of the special symbol) is executed. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination count information to the hall computer (or a data display device) every time the number of times the special symbol stop display is executed reaches a predetermined number.
The "start port information" is external information related to the entry of game balls into the start ports 51 and 52. Each time the CPU 210 detects the ON state of the detection signal input from the start port switches 101 and 102, it outputs an external signal corresponding to the start port information to the hall computer (or a data display device).

The "jackpot information" is external information related to the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or a data display device) every time a jackpot gaming state occurs.
The "outlet payout information" is external information related to the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the outlet payout number information to the hall computer every time the value of the external information out ball number counter reaches a predetermined value.
The "security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the value of the security timer is "1" or greater, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information confirmation count counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the external information confirmation count counter has reached the predetermined value, the pattern confirmation count information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information confirmation count counter. As a result, the pattern confirmation count information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information has reached the predetermined value, the start port information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information. As a result, the start port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In addition, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). If it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached the predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot count counter. This causes the jackpot information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the out ball count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the out ball count counter for external information has reached the predetermined value, the out port payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) is subtracted from the value of the out ball count counter for external information. As a result, the out port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In addition, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 corresponds to a playable state.
Then, if it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area is not a value corresponding to a playable state (determined to be a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, or a backup abnormal state), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1". If it is determined that the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1", the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits).
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is also cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".

Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Then, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a playable state, a normal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting change time display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation time display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is set in the common 0 output request buffer.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by LED1 to LED8, among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is obtained, and display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by LED9 to LED16, among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the regular display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value of the regular display pattern counter is set as output data a.

Next, it is determined whether the value set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 is a value that specifies any of the special game phases, including ``state before opening of first large prize opening,'' ``first large prize opening opening control state,'' ``first large prize opening closing effective state,'' ``first large prize opening opening end waiting state,'' ``state before opening of second large prize opening,'' ``second large prize opening opening control state,'' ``second large prize opening closing effective state,'' and ``second large prize opening opening end waiting state.''
Then, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area is a value specifying any of the special game phases among "state before first large prize opening", "first large prize opening opening control state", "first large prize opening closing valid state", "first large prize opening opening end waiting state", "state before second large prize opening opening", "second large prize opening opening control state", "second large prize opening closing valid state" and "second large prize opening opening end waiting state", the value set in the special pattern determination flag area of RAM 230 (a value corresponding to the type of "small win pattern" or "large win pattern") is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data b.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area is not a value specifying any of the special game phases among "state before opening of first large prize opening,""first large prize opening opening control state,""first large prize opening closing effective state,""first large prize opening opening end waiting state,""state before opening of second large prize opening,""second large prize opening opening control state,""second large prize opening closing effective state," and "second large prize opening opening end waiting state," then output data b is not set.
Next, the value set in the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data c.

Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically ORing the output data a to c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 17 and 18 display normal symbols, LEDs 19 to 23 display the number of rounds of play to be executed during a jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state), and LED 24 displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be shot.
Next, the value of the special chart 1 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data d.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data e.
Next, the value of the normal pending number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data f.
Next, it is determined whether the power supply has been restored.
Then, when it is determined that the power supply has been restored, the value set in the time-shortening control flag area is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power has not been restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data h.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically ORing the output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special chart 1, LEDs 27 and 28 display the number of reserved special chart 2, LEDs 29 and 30 display the number of reserved regular charts, LED 31 displays the game status when the power is restored (whether a high probability state of regular charts is occurring or a low probability state of regular charts is occurring), and LED 32 displays the current game status (time-saving control is being executed or stopped).

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that a setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "- " is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "r", LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "n.", LEDs 49 to 56 display the letter "-", and LEDs 57 to 64 display numbers indicating the set value.

In the display data setting process during setting confirmation, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "r" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the character "n." is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and numbers indicating the set value are displayed by LED57 to LED64. Note that LED49 to LED56 are turned off.

In the abnormality display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "r." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data (error code) corresponding to the abnormal state that has occurred (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, LED33 to LED40 display the letter "E," LED41 to LED48 display the letter "r.", and LED57 to LED64 display numbers indicating an error code. LED49 to LED56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, the control data (drive data) to be output to each of the solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, 66 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, a port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, the solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, 66, etc.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer are output to the output port 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signals set in the port output request buffer are output to the hall computer. Also, the solenoids 64 to 66 are driven and controlled based on the drive signals set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, a test signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, information for testing (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is based on a program for executing a test-related process defined by the gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, time-saving control execution state, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S4-25, a performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26, which will be described later.
In step S4-26, a register restore process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the program returns to the original process. In the register restore process, the register values saved in step S4-1 are restored. After the register restore process is completed, the program returns to the main loop process (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, the process first proceeds to step S29-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S29-1, an output data clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the A register is set to "0".
In step S29-2, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. As a result, output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 goes low.

In step S29-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 4. As a result, output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 goes low.
In step S29-4, a common selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether the value of the common counter has reached an upper limit value (in this embodiment, "3") or not. If it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the common counter.

In step S29-5, a common output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6.
In the common output process, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1.
That is, when the value of the common counter is "0", output data in which "COM0" is at high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "1", output data in which "COM1" is at high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "2", output data in which "COM2" is at high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "3", output data in which "COM3" is at high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

In addition, in the common output process, output data of the launch permission signal is output to output port 1.
That is, first, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (is set).
When it is determined that a playable state has occurred, output data for setting the launch permission signal to a high level is output to the output port 1. As a result, the launch permission signal is output.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the playable state has not occurred, output data for setting the launch permission signal to a low level is output to the output port 1. This stops the output of the launch permission signal.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.
In this embodiment, the common output process is configured to set the output of the launch permission signal only when it is determined that a playable state has occurred. As a result, the launch permission signal is output only while a playable state is occurring (being set). However, the common output process may be configured to set the output of the launch permission signal regardless of the gaming machine state. With this configuration, the launch permission signal can be output at all times while the main control board 200 is powered on.

In step S29-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, a main display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process (specifically, the normal display data setting process) of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt processing.

In step S29-8, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0.
As a result, data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, a performance display device output process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4), which will be described later.

In step S29-11, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process when changing settings, the display data setting process when checking settings, or the display data setting process when an abnormality occurs).

In step S29-12, a performance display device data output process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, the process first proceeds to step S30-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S30-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S30-2, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, the value of the common counter is first confirmed. Then, the display data set in the area of the discrimination segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230 corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt process.

In step S30-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S30-1 (the register values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S30-1 (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) are restored.
In step S30-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. This allows the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like.

(Settings related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, the process first proceeds to step S37-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether a setting change state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2, and if it is determined that a setting change state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether or not a setting change state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has not occurred.

In step S37-2, a setting value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded), and the acquired setting values are stored in a register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, with regard to the RAM clear switch 207, if an on state occurs, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if an on state does not occur, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed.
In step S37-4, a setting value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the setting value update process, "1" is added to the setting value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether the setting value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6"), and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (the setting value is greater than or equal to the predetermined setting comparison value) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is less than the predetermined setting comparison value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, a setting value initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, the setting values stored in the registers are overwritten with predetermined initial values (in this embodiment, "0").
In step S37-7, a set value save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the set value save process, the set values stored in the registers are saved in the set value area of RAM 230.

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (is in the OFF state) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-9. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19).
Here, if the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state, and if the ON state is not occurring, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in an ON state.
In step S37-9, a sub-command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the sub-command setting process, a setting-related end command (sub-command) is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in RAM 230.

In step S37-10, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in a sub-command output request buffer in RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a setting value specification command for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, and the like.
In step S37-11, a RAM set process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). In the RAM set process, the game machine state is set to a playable state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to a playable state is saved as the value of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (gaming machine state flag).

(Switch management process)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, the process first proceeds to step S5-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the on state of the actuation port switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the actuation port switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2. If it is determined that the on state of the actuation port switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, a normal starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-4. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special chart 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special chart 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special chart 2 start port switch 102 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special chart 2 start port switch 102 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-6. If it is determined that the on state of the special chart 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.
In step S5-6, a special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. The special chart 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the on state of the V area switch 110 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the V area switch 110 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-8. If it is determined that the on state of the V area switch 110 has not been detected (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S5-8, a V passage detection process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In the V passage detection process, first, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in progress.
The "V valid period" is the period from the start of the first round (small win game) to the end of the first round after which the valid time (interval time) for closing the large prize opening has elapsed.
If it is determined that the V valid period is in progress, then "1" is set in the V winning flag area of RAM 230, and a V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the V valid period is not in progress, the process ends and proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In this embodiment, if the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the ``first large prize opening control state'' or the ``first large prize opening closing valid state,'' it is determined that the V prize is valid, and if the value corresponds to another special game phase, it is determined that the V prize is not valid.

(Normal starting ball detection process)
Next, the normal starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process.
When the normal starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, the process first proceeds to step S6-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S6-1, a normal symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process, a winning random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the regular map pending number counter is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4") or not. If it is determined that the value of the regular map pending number counter is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3. If it is determined that the value of the regular map pending number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3).
In step S6-3, a regular map reservation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the regular map reservation counter update process, the value set in the regular map reservation counter is added with "1" and the new value is set in the regular map reservation counter.

In step S6-4, a normal random number storage process is executed, and the process is terminated to move to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal random number storage process, the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the normal game information storage area of the RAM 230 as normal game information.
The RAM 230 is composed of a memory area 0 in which regular game information during game execution is stored, and a regular game information memory area in which regular game information for which a regular win/loss determination is pending is stored.
The regular game play information storage area is configured to include memory area 1 to memory area 4 as storage areas capable of storing regular game play information.
The priority of each memory area is specified as follows, from highest priority to lowest priority: memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, memory area 4 (highest to lowest). The regular game information stored in the regular game information storage area is subjected to regular game winning/losing judgment in order from the information stored in the memory area with the highest priority.

In the normal random number storage process, the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored as normal game information in the normal game information storage area. At this time, the normal game information is stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the available storage areas.
That is, if the current value of the regular map reserved number counter is "1", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in memory area 1. If the current value of the regular map reserved number counter is "2", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the regular map reserved number counter is "3", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the regular map reserved number counter is "4", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in memory area 4.

(Special Figure 1 Starting ball detection process)
Next, the special chart 1 starting ball detection process in step S5-4 will be explained.
Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for special chart 1.
When the special chart 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, it first proceeds to step S7-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in a special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information start hole ball entry count counter.
In step S7-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special drawing 1 is set in the reserved number counter address setting area of RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special chart 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special chart 2 starting ball detection process in step S5-6 will be explained.
Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, it first proceeds to step S8-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information start hole ball entry count counter.
In step S8-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special drawing 2 is set in the reserved number counter address area of RAM 230.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special pattern random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special pattern random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, the process first proceeds to step S9-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special drawing reservation number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special drawing reservation number acquisition process, the value (special drawing 1 reservation number or special drawing 2 reservation number) of the special drawing reservation number counter (special drawing 1 reservation number counter or special drawing 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area is acquired (loaded).

In step S9-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special symbol random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random value values) such as a jackpot random number, a winning symbol random number, a reach group random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from the loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether the number of reserved special drawings (number of reserved special drawings 1 or number of reserved special drawings 2) obtained in step S9-2 is the upper limit value. If it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5. If it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is the upper limit value (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S5-5, S5-7).
In this embodiment, "4" is stipulated as the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 1. On the other hand, "1" is stipulated as the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 2. Note that the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 2 may be stipulated as "4".
In step S9-5, a special reserved number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special reserved number counter update process, the value set in the special reserved number counter (special reserved number counter 1 or special reserved number counter 2) specified by the address set in the reserved number counter address area is added with "1" and the value is set in the special reserved number counter.

In step S9-6, a special random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special random number storage process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in a special game information storage area (special game information storage area or special game information storage area) of the RAM 230 as special game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2).
The RAM 230 is composed of a memory area 0 in which special chart game information during game execution is stored, a special chart 1 game information memory area in which special chart 1 game information for which start judgment is pending is stored, and a special chart 2 game information memory area in which start judgment is pending.
The special chart 1 game information memory area is configured to include memory area 1 to memory area 4 as memory areas capable of storing special chart 1 game information.
The priority of each memory area is specified as memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (higher to lower) in order of priority. Then, the special game information stored in the special game information storage area is executed in order of priority from the memory area with the higher priority.
The special chart 2 game information memory area is configured to include memory area 1 to memory area 4 as memory areas capable of storing special chart 2 game information.
The priority of each memory area is specified as memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (higher to lower) in order of priority. Then, the special game information stored in the special game information storage area is executed in order of priority from the memory area with the higher priority.

In the special symbol random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special symbol 1 game information storage area as special symbol 1 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the available storage areas.
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 1. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special symbol 2 game information storage area as the special symbol 2 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the available storage areas.
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 1. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 4.

In step S9-7, a reserved number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number of special symbols (reserved number of special symbols 1 or reserved number of special symbols 2) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number of special symbols 1 has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230, and if it is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number of special symbols 2 has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S9-8, a pre-determination process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or S5-7). In the pre-determination process, various lottery results are pre-determined based on the game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination target game information") saved (stored) in the special game information storage area (special game information 1 or special game information 2 storage area) in step S9-6.
In this embodiment, pre-determination of various lottery results is performed for all game information (special chart 1 game information and special chart 2 game information).
In addition, for game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, a configuration may be adopted in which a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed. Also, for special chart 2 game information acquired (stored) during the stoppage of time-saving control, a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed, and for special chart 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of time-saving control, a configuration may be adopted in which a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed.

In the preliminary judgment process, first, a preliminary special drawing hit judgment process is executed.
In the pre-special pattern hit determination process, the result of the special pattern lottery ("big hit", "small hit", or "miss") is determined (pre-special pattern hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol big win lottery table in which big win values of the special symbol lottery are registered, and a special symbol small win lottery table in which small win values of the special symbol lottery are registered.
In the pre-special chart hit determination process, first, the pre-special chart big hit determination process is executed.
In the pre-special jackpot determination process, a special jackpot lottery table is read out. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read special jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether or not a "jackpot" has been won (pre-special jackpot determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has been won (the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has not been won.
If the pre-special chart big win determination process determines that the player has not won a "big win," then the pre-special chart small win determination process is executed.
In the advance small special win judgment process, the special small win lottery table is read. Then, based on the big win random number included in the advance judgment target game information and the read special small win lottery table, it is judged whether or not the "small win" has been won (advance small special win judgment).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information matches the small jackpot value registered in the special small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "small jackpot" has been won (the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "small jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information does not match the small jackpot value registered in the special small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "small jackpot" has not been won.
If the advance special pattern small win determination process determines that a "small win" has not been won, the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "miss."
At this time, as described above, if the reserved type of the pre-determined game information is special chart 1 game information, either a "big hit" or a "miss" is determined (a "small hit" is never determined).
On the other hand, if the reserved type of the pre-determined game information is special chart 2 game information, it is determined to be either a "big hit," a "small hit," or a "miss."

In the advance determination process, next, advance special symbol determination process is executed. In the advance special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (advance special symbol determination).
In the pre-special pattern determination process, if the pre-special pattern hit determination determines a "jackpot" (win), the type of "jackpot pattern" is determined (pre-special pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a winning symbol selection table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of the "winning symbol" is registered. In addition, as the winning symbol selection table, a first winning symbol selection table corresponding to the special symbol 1 game information and a second winning symbol selection table corresponding to the special symbol 2 game information are stored.
In the first jackpot symbol selection table, "jackpot symbol 1" and "jackpot symbol 2" are registered as types of "jackpot symbols". On the other hand, in the second jackpot symbol selection table, only "jackpot symbol 3" is registered as a type of "jackpot symbol".
In the process of determining the type of the "jackpot pattern", if the pre-determined game information is the special game information, the first jackpot pattern lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot pattern is determined based on the winning pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the first jackpot pattern lottery table that has been read out.
On the other hand, when the pre-determined game information is the special game information 2, the second jackpot symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read second jackpot symbol selection table.

On the other hand, in the pre-special chart pattern determination process, if the pre-special chart hit determination determines a "small hit" (winning), the type of "small hit pattern" is determined (pre-special chart pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a small win pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning pattern random number and the types of "small win pattern"("small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 3") is registered.
In the process of determining the type of the "small winning symbol", a small winning symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the advance special pattern determination process, if the advance special pattern hit determination determines that the winning combination is a "miss" (failure), the type of the stopping pattern is determined to be a "miss pattern" (advance special pattern determination).

In the pre-determination process, next, a pre-fluctuation pattern table type determination process is executed. In the pre-fluctuation pattern table type determination process, the fluctuation pattern table type is determined (pre-fluctuation pattern table type determination).
ROM 220 stores a fluctuation pattern table type determination table in which the correspondence between combinations of the previous winning pattern, the reserved type (special chart 1 gaming information or special chart 2 gaming information) of the pre-determined gaming information (start-determined gaming information), the value of the first time-saving counter, the value of the second time-saving counter, the value of the first special variable counter, the value of the second special variable counter, the reserved number of special chart 1, the reserved number of special chart 2, etc., and the fluctuation pattern table type is registered.
In the preliminary variation pattern table type determination process, first, the variation pattern table type determination table is read. Also, information such as the previous winning symbol, the reserved type of the pre-determined game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2), the value of the first time-saving counter, the value of the second time-saving counter, the value of the first special variation counter, the value of the second special variation counter, the reserved number of special game 1, the reserved number of special game 2, etc. is confirmed. Then, the variation pattern table type determination table is referenced to obtain the variation pattern table type corresponding to the confirmed information.

In the preliminary judgment process, next, a preliminary special chart change mode judgment process is executed.
In the pre-special chart fluctuation mode determination process, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined (pre-special chart fluctuation mode determination).
In the pre-special chart change mode determination process, if the pre-special chart hit determination determines a "big hit" or a "small hit," the change mode number (type of change mode) and the change pattern number (type of change pattern) are determined by the pre-win-time change pattern determination process described below.
On the other hand, if the preliminary special winning judgment determines that the lottery has lost, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined by the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process in the event of a loss, which will be described later.

In the pre-variation pattern determination process at the time of winning, first, the variation pattern table type determined by the pre-variation pattern table type determination, the hold type of the game information to be pre-determined (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), the type of the stopping pattern determined by the pre-special chart pattern determination, etc. are confirmed, and the variation table (variation mode determination table and variation pattern determination table) corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read fluctuation mode determination table.
In addition, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read fluctuation pattern determination table.

In the pre-determining process for determining the fluctuation pattern when losing, first, the type of reach group random number contained in the pre-determined game information ('undefined value' or 'fixed value') is determined (pre-determining the random number type).
In this embodiment, the types of reach group random numbers are defined as "indefinite value" and "fixed value."
An "indeterminate value" is a type of reach group random number in which the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are not determined when game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is acquired (stored), and the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined based on the number of reserved balls at that time (special chart 1 reserved number or special chart 2 reserved number) when a start judgment based on the game information is executed.
The "fixed value" is a type of reach group random number for which the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined when game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is acquired (stored).
In this embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of "0" to "10006." Of the range of "0" to "10006,""0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values," and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values."
Therefore, in the pre-random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number contained in the pre-determined game information is less than "8500", it is determined to be an "indefinite value", and if it is "8500" or greater, it is determined to be a "fixed value".

In the pre-fluctuation pattern determination process in the event of loss, if the pre-random number type determination results in an ``indeterminate value,'' the process moves to the next process without performing the pre-fluctuation pattern table type determination described below, the pre-reach group determination described below, and the pre-fluctuation mode determination in the event of loss.
On the other hand, if the preliminary random number type determination determines that the random number is a "fixed value", a preliminary reach group determination and a preliminary fluctuation pattern determination are performed.

In the advance reach group determination, the reach group number (reach group type) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which the correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (reach group types) is registered.
In addition, as reach group determination tables, a reach group determination table corresponding to an "indefinite value" and a reach group determination table corresponding to a "fixed value" are stored.
In the reach group determination table corresponding to an "indefinite value", the reach group number corresponding to an "indefinite value" (hereinafter referred to as the "indefinite value reach group") is registered as the reach group number. On the other hand, in the reach group determination table corresponding to a "fixed value", the reach group number corresponding to a "fixed value" (hereinafter referred to as the "fixed value reach group") is registered as the reach group number.
In the advance reach group determination, a reach group determination table corresponding to a "fixed value" is read out. Then, a reach group number (a type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the advance determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.
In the pre-fluctuation mode determination, first, the fluctuation pattern table type determined by the pre-fluctuation pattern table type determination, the reach group number determined by the pre-reach group determination, the hold type of the game information to be pre-determined (special game information 1 or special game information 2), the value of the hold number counter corresponding to the hold type of the game information to be pre-determined (special game information 1 hold number counter or special game information 2 hold number counter), etc. are confirmed, and the fluctuation table (fluctuation mode determination table and fluctuation pattern determination table) corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read fluctuation mode determination table.
In addition, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read fluctuation pattern determination table.

In the advance judgment process, next, a read-ahead designation command setting process is executed.
In the look-ahead designation command setting process, a first look-ahead designation command that specifies the fluctuation mode number determined by the advance fluctuation mode determination, and a second look-ahead designation command that specifies the fluctuation pattern number determined by the advance fluctuation pattern determination are stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
Specifically, when the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, a first look-ahead designation command that specifies the fluctuation mode number determined by the pre-winning fluctuation mode determination, and a second look-ahead designation command that specifies the fluctuation pattern number determined by the pre-winning fluctuation mode determination are stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, when a pre-fluctuating pattern determination process is executed in the event of a loss, if the pre-fluctuating random number type determination determines that the value is a "fixed value," a first look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation mode number determined by the pre-fluctuating mode determination, and a second look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation pattern number determined by the pre-fluctuating mode determination are stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, when a pre-fluctuating pattern determination process is executed in the event of a loss, if the pre-random number type determination determines that the result is an "undefined value," a first look-ahead designation command specifying an "undefined value" and a second look-ahead designation command specifying an "undefined value" are stored in the sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process in step S4-13 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In this embodiment, the following situations and stages (hereinafter referred to as "special game phases") of a game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on a special pattern lottery are defined: "state waiting for special pattern change", "state during special pattern change", "state displaying special pattern", "state before first large prize opening", "first large prize opening opening control state", "first large prize opening closure valid state", "waiting for first large prize opening opening to end", "state before second large prize opening", "second large prize opening opening control state", "second large prize opening closure valid state", and "waiting for second large prize opening opening to end".
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the special game phases "11" is set.
The ROM 220 also stores special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games, which correspond to each special game phase.
In the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, the process first proceeds to step S10-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S10-1, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, a value (special game phase) set in a special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, a special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read out.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read out in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special chart change waiting state", the special chart change waiting process described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "special chart changing state", the special chart changing process described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "special chart stopped pattern display state", the special chart stopped process described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "first large prize opening pre-opening state", the first large prize opening pre-opening process described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "first large prize opening opening control state", the first large prize opening opening control process described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "first large prize opening closure enabled state", the first large prize opening closure control process described later is started, The large prize opening closure enable process is started, and if the value corresponds to the ``first large prize opening open end wait state'', the first large prize opening open end wait process described below is started, if the value corresponds to the ``second large prize opening pre-open state'', the second large prize opening pre-open process described below is started, if the value corresponds to the ``second large prize opening open control state'', the second large prize opening open control process described below is started, if the value corresponds to the ``second large prize opening closure enable state'', the second large prize opening closure enable process described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the ``second large prize opening open end wait state'', the second large prize opening open end wait process described below is started.

(Waiting for special chart changes)
Next, the special chart change waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the special chart change waiting process.
When the special chart change waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 44, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the number of reserved special drawings is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-2. If it is determined that the value of the reserved special drawing number is not "1" or greater (No), the process proceeds to step S11-13.
Here, if the value of at least one of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter and the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1" or more, it is determined that the special drawing reserved number is "1" or more, and if the values of both counters are "0", it is determined that the special drawing reserved number is not "1" or more.

In step S11-2, a special symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-3. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
In this embodiment, a start judgment is performed for the game information (special chart 1 game information and special chart 2 game information) stored in the game information memory area (special chart 1 game information memory area and special chart 2 game information memory area) in the order in which it was acquired (in the order in which it was stored).
Here, the "start judgment" is a series of judgment processes including the special chart hit judgment process (step S11-4), the special chart pattern judgment process (step S11-5), the special chart stop pattern number judgment process (step S11-7), the special chart change pattern judgment process (step S11-8), etc., which will be described later.
In the special symbol memory area shift process, first, a game information memory area to be shifted is selected from the special symbol 1 game information memory area and the special symbol 2 game information memory area.
At this time, if special chart 1 game information is stored in memory area 1 of the special chart 1 game information storage area and special chart 2 game information is not stored in memory area 1 of the special chart 2 game information storage area, the special chart 1 game information storage area is selected as the game information storage area to shift the memory area.
On the other hand, when special chart 2 game information is stored in memory area 1 of the special chart 2 game information storage area and special chart 1 game information is not stored in memory area 1 of the special chart 1 game information storage area, the special chart 2 game information storage area is selected as the game information storage area to shift the memory area.
On the other hand, when special chart 1 game information is stored in memory area 1 of the special chart 1 game information storage area and special chart 2 game information is stored in memory area 1 of the special chart 2 game information storage area, the game information storage area in which the game information acquired (stored) earlier is stored is selected as the game information storage area to shift the memory area from among the special chart 1 game information stored in memory area 1 of the special chart 1 game information storage area and the special chart 2 game information stored in memory area 1 of the special chart 2 game information storage area.

In the special symbol storage area shift process, next, the storage area is shifted.
Specifically, when the special figure 1 game information storage area is selected as the game information storage area to shift the memory area, a value (in this embodiment, "0") that designates a game based on the special figure 1 game information is set as the special pattern discrimination flag setting value, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 reserved number counter. In addition, a reserved number designation command that designates that the special figure 1 reserved number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. Furthermore, the memory contents of the memory area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of the memory area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the memory area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the memory contents of the memory area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the memory area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the memory contents of the memory area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the memory area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the memory contents of the memory area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the memory area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the contents of memory area 4 of the special chart 1 game information memory area are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information storage area is selected as the game information storage area to shift the memory area, a value (in this embodiment, "1") that specifies a game based on the special figure 2 game information is set as the special pattern discrimination flag setting value, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 reserved number counter. In addition, a reserved number designation command that specifies that the special figure 2 reserved number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. Furthermore, the memory contents of the memory area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of the memory area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted to the memory area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the memory contents of the memory area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted to the memory area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the memory contents of the memory area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted to the memory area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the contents of memory area 4 of the special chart 2 game information memory area are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-3, a setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the setting abnormality determination process, occurrence of a setting abnormality is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is obtained. Next, it is determined whether the obtained setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6") or not.
Then, when it is determined that the acquired setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (is equal to or greater than the predetermined setting comparison value), a value corresponding to the setting abnormal state is saved as the value (gaming machine state flag) of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. Also, a subcommand designating the occurrence of the setting abnormality is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-4).

In step S11-4, a special symbol winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special symbol winning determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special symbol winning determination).
In the special chart hit determination process, first, the special chart big hit determination process is executed.
In the special symbol jackpot determination process, the special symbol jackpot lottery table is read out. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the game information (start determination target game information) stored in the memory area 0 and the read special symbol jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot" (special symbol jackpot determination).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, the result of the special pattern lottery is judged to be a "jackpot" (win).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the jackpot has not been won.
If the special symbol big win judgment process determines that the player has not won the big win, the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is checked. If the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "0", the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "miss". On the other hand, if the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", the special symbol small win judgment process is executed.
In the special small win judgment process, the special small win lottery table is read out. Then, based on the value of the big win random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read special small win lottery table, it is judged whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a "small win" or not (special small win judgment).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the small jackpot value registered in the special pattern small jackpot lottery table, the result of the special pattern lottery is judged to be a "small jackpot" (win).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 does not match the small jackpot value registered in the special chart small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "small jackpot" has not been won.
If the special symbol small win determination process determines that a "small win" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "miss."

In step S11-5, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Specifically, in the special symbol pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hit determination has determined that there has been a "jackpot" (a win).
Then, if the special pattern hit judgment determines that there has been a "jackpot" (a win), the type of "jackpot pattern" is determined.
For this purpose, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "0", the first big win symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the big win symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the first big win symbol selection table that has been read out.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", the second jackpot symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read second jackpot symbol selection table.
On the other hand, if the special pattern hit judgment determines that it is a "small hit" (winning), the type of "small hit pattern" is determined.
For this purpose, a small win symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the small win symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read small win symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, if the special winning judgment results in a "miss" (failure), the type of the stopping pattern is judged to be a "missing pattern."
Next, a value corresponding to the type of the determined stopping symbol is set in a special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-6, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command that designates the type of the stopped symbol determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-7, a special symbol stop pattern number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special symbol stop pattern number determination process, the stop pattern number of the special symbol is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop pattern number lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning pattern random number value and the stop pattern number (segment data) is registered.
In addition, as the stopping pattern number lottery tables, a stopping pattern number lottery table at the time of a big win corresponding to a "big win", a stopping pattern number lottery table at the time of a small win corresponding to a "small win", and a stopping pattern number lottery table at the time of a loss corresponding to a "miss" are stored.
In addition, as the lottery tables for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot, a lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) and a lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) are stored.
In the special symbol stop pattern number determination process, first, the result of the special symbol hit determination is confirmed.
When the special symbol hit determination determines that the player has won the jackpot (a prize), the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is checked, and a lottery table for the stop symbol number at the jackpot corresponding to the result of the check is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the lottery table for the stop symbol number at the jackpot that has been read out.
On the other hand, when the special winning judgment determines that the player has won a small prize (a win), the system reads out a small prize stop pattern number selection table. Then, the system determines the stop pattern number based on the winning pattern random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read out small prize stop pattern number selection table.
On the other hand, when the special winning judgment results in a "loss" (loss), the lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of loss is read out. Then, the stop pattern number is determined based on the winning pattern random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of loss that has been read out.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in a stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-8, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special symbol variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (type of variation mode and type of variation pattern) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special chart fluctuation pattern determination process, first, a fluctuation pattern table type determination process is executed. In the fluctuation pattern table type determination process, the fluctuation pattern table type is determined (fluctuation pattern table type determination).
Specifically, in the variation pattern table type determination process, first, the variation pattern table type determination table is read. Also, the previous winning symbol, the reserved type of the game information stored in the memory area 0 (special game information 1 or special game information 2), the value of the first time-saving counter, the value of the second time-saving counter, the value of the first special variation counter, the value of the second special variation counter, the reserved number of special game 1, the reserved number of special game 2, etc. are confirmed. Then, the variation pattern table type determination table is referred to to obtain the variation pattern table type corresponding to the confirmed information.

The special chart change pattern determination process then checks the result of the special chart hit determination. If the result of the special chart hit determination is a "miss" (losing the prize), the process to determine the special chart change mode when the prize is lost, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the special chart hit determination is a "big hit" or "small hit" (winning the prize), the process to determine the special chart change mode when the prize is won, which will be described later, is executed.

In the process of determining the special chart change mode when a winner is defeated, first, a reach group determination process is executed.
In the reach group determination process, the reach group number (reach group type) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which the correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (reach group types) is registered.
In addition, as a reach group judgment table, a reach group judgment table corresponding to each combination of hold type (type of game information stored in memory area 0 (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information)), hold number, and game status (time-saving control in progress/stopped) is stored.
In the reach group judgment, the special symbol discrimination flag setting value, the reserved number, and the game state are confirmed, and the reach group judgment table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, the reach group number is judged based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read reach group judgment table.

In the process of determining the change mode of the special chart when the player loses the election, the change mode determination process is then executed.
In the fluctuation mode determination process, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined.
Specifically, in the fluctuation mode determination process, first, the fluctuation pattern table type determined by the fluctuation pattern table type determination, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination, the hold type of the game information stored in memory area 0 (special game information 1 or special game information 2), the value of the hold number counter (special game information 1 hold number counter or special game information 2 hold number counter) corresponding to the hold type of the game information stored in memory area 0, etc. are confirmed, and the fluctuation table (fluctuation mode determination table and fluctuation pattern determination table) corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read fluctuation mode determination table.
In addition, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read fluctuation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the process of determining the special chart change state when a prize is won, the change mode number (type of change mode) and the change pattern number (type of change pattern) are determined.
Specifically, in the process of determining the special chart change mode when a prize is won, first, the change pattern table type determined by the change pattern table type determination, the reserved type of game information stored in memory area 0 (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), the type of stopping pattern determined by the special chart pattern determination, etc. are confirmed, and the change table (change mode determination table and change pattern determination table) corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read fluctuation mode determination table.
In addition, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read fluctuation pattern determination table.

In step S11-9, a fluctuation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the fluctuation pattern command setting process, a fluctuation mode designation command that designates the fluctuation mode number (fluctuation mode type) determined in step S11-8, and a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates the fluctuation pattern number (fluctuation pattern type) determined in step S11-8 are stored in a subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-10, a special symbol variation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special symbol variation time setting process, the time for the variation display of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special game variable time setting process, first, the variable time 1 corresponding to the variable mode number determined in step S11-8 and the variable time 2 corresponding to the variable pattern number determined in step S11-8 are obtained. Then, the obtained variable time 1 and variable time 2 are added to calculate the variable time. Then, the calculated variable time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-11, a special chart variable display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special chart variable display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the special chart display device is set.
Specifically, in the special chart variable display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special chart display timer.
Next, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special pattern 1 display counter. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 1 display device, a segment corresponding to the value of the special pattern 1 display counter is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special pattern 2 display counter. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special pattern 2 display counter is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-12, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game phase changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-13, a customer waiting setting process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, a demo designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special chart change processing)
Next, the special chart change processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing processing during special chart change.
When the special chart change processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 45, it first proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-7.
In step S12-2, a special symbol stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-3. In the special symbol stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.

In step S12-3, a special chart stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-4. In the special chart stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special chart display device is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number memory area of RAM 230 is obtained.
Next, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0", the acquired stop pattern number (data corresponding to the stop pattern number) is set as the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop pattern number is controlled to light up (stop display).
On the other hand, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1", the acquired stop pattern number (data corresponding to the stop pattern number) is set as the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop pattern number is controlled to light up (stop display).

In step S12-4, a stop command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the stop command setting process, the stop command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 in this embodiment) is added to the value of the external information determination number counter.
In step S12-5, a number-of-times-off management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6, which will be described later.
In step S12-6, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game stop symbol display state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S12-7, it is determined whether the value of the special chart display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-8, and if it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-8, a special chart variable display data update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special chart variable display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the special chart display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special pattern change display data update process, when the first special pattern change display is being executed, the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter is incremented by "1". On the other hand, when the second special pattern change display is being executed, the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter is incremented by "1".

(Number of cutoffs management process)
Next, the cut-off number management process executed in step S12-5 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the number of cutoff management process.
When the number of times cutoff management process is executed in step S12-5, the process first proceeds to step S28-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S28-1, it is determined whether or not a special fluctuation is occurring, and if it is determined that a special fluctuation is occurring (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-2, and if it is determined that a special fluctuation is not occurring (No), the process proceeds to step S28-9.
Here, if the value set in the special fluctuation flag area of RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that a special fluctuation is occurring, and if the value set in the special fluctuation flag area is "0", it is determined that a special fluctuation is not occurring.

In step S28-2, it is determined whether the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1" or not, and if it is determined that the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is not "1" (the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0") (No), the process proceeds to step S28-3, and if it is determined that the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-6.
In step S28-3, a first special fluctuation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4. In the first special fluctuation counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first special fluctuation counter.
In step S28-4, it is determined whether the value of the first special fluctuation counter is "0" or less, and if it is determined that the value of the first special fluctuation counter is "0" or less (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-5, and if it is determined that the value of the first special fluctuation counter is not "0" or less (is "1" or greater) (No), the process proceeds to step S28-9.
In step S28-5, a special fluctuation end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-9. In the special fluctuation end process, "0" is set in the special fluctuation flag area of RAM 230. Also, "0" is set as the value of each special fluctuation counter (first special fluctuation counter, second special fluctuation counter). This ends the special fluctuation.

In step S28-6, a second special fluctuation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-7. In the second special fluctuation counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second special fluctuation counter.
In step S28-7, it is determined whether the value of the second special fluctuation counter is "0" or less, and if it is determined that the value of the second special fluctuation counter is "0" or less (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-8, and if it is determined that the value of the second special fluctuation counter is not "0" or less (is "1" or greater) (No), the process proceeds to step S28-9.
In step S28-8, a special variation end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-9. In the special variation end process, "0" is set in the special variation flag area of RAM 230. Also, "0" is set as the value of each special variation counter (first special variation counter, second special variation counter). This ends the special variation.

In step S28-9, it is determined whether or not time-saving control is in progress, and if it is determined that time-saving control is in progress (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-10, and if it is determined that time-saving control is not in progress (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6).
Here, if the value set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that time-saving control is in progress, and if the value set in the time-saving control flag area is "0", it is determined that time-saving control is not in progress.
In step S28-10, a second time-saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-11. In the second time-saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time-saving counter.
In step S28-11, it is determined whether the value of the second time-saving counter is equal to or less than "0" (whether "time-saving termination condition 2" is met or not), and if it is determined that the value of the second time-saving counter is not equal to or less than "0"("time-saving termination condition 2" is not met) (No), the process proceeds to step S28-12, and if it is determined that the value of the second time-saving counter is equal to or less than "0"("time-saving termination condition 2" is met) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-18.
In step S28-12, it is determined whether the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1" or not, and if it is determined that the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-13, and if it is determined that the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is not "1" (the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0") (No), the process proceeds to step S28-15.

In step S28-13, a first time-saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-14. In the first time-saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time-saving counter.
In step S28-14, it is determined whether the value of the first time-saving counter is equal to or less than "0" (whether "time-saving termination condition 1" is met or not), and if it is determined that the value of the first time-saving counter is not equal to or less than "0"("time-saving termination condition 1" is not met) (No), the process proceeds to step S28-15, and if it is determined that the value of the first time-saving counter is equal to or less than "0"("time-saving termination condition 1" is met) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-18.
In step S28-15, it is determined whether or not a "small win" has been won, and if it is determined that a "small win" has been won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-16, and if it is determined that a "small win" has not been won (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6).
Here, if the value set in the special pattern determination flag area of RAM 230 is a value corresponding to a "small win pattern," it is determined that a "small win" has been won, and if the value set in the special pattern determination flag area is not a value corresponding to a "small win pattern," it is determined that a "small win" has not been won.

In step S28-16, a third time-saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-17. In the third time-saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the third time-saving counter.
In step S28-17, it is determined whether the value of the third time-saving counter is equal to or less than "0" (whether "time-saving termination condition 3" is met or not), and if it is determined that the value of the third time-saving counter is equal to or less than "0"("time-saving termination condition 3" is met) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-18, and if it is determined that the value of the third time-saving counter is not equal to or less than "0"("time-saving termination condition 3" is not met) (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6).
In step S28-18, a time-saving control stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-19. In the time-saving control stop process, "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Also, "0" is set as the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter to third time-saving counter). This stops the time-saving control.
In step S28-19, a special variation setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-20. In the special variation setting process, "1" is set in the special variation flag area of the RAM 230. Also, the value of the first special variation counter is set to "15". Furthermore, the value of the second special variation counter is set to "4". This starts the special variation in response to the start of the next special symbol variation display.
In step S28-20, a sub-command setting process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6). In the sub-command setting process, a sub-command that specifies a change in the game state (stop of the time-saving control) is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special map stopped processing)
Next, the special chart stop processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 47 is a flowchart showing processing while a special chart is stopped.
When the special drawing stop processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 47, it first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S13-2, it is determined whether the type of the stopped pattern is a "jackpot pattern" or not, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is a "jackpot pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-3, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is not a "jackpot pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-8.
In step S13-3, a game status update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-4. In the game status update process, the game status is updated.
Specifically, in the game status update process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area, the value of the time-saving counter is set to "0", and "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. This stops the time-saving control.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving control flag area is not set to "1" (is set to "0"), the process proceeds to the next step.
In step S13-4, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "big win symbol." In addition, in each second special electric role control table, an opening time, a big prize opening closing effective time, a big prize opening closing time, an ending time, a number of rounds (number of round games), a number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each round (round game), and control data (solenoid control data and control time data) of the special electric role solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switch are specified.
In the special electric role control data setting process, a second special electric role control table corresponding to the type of “jackpot pattern” determined in step S11-5 is read out, and the read out second special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S13-5, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, an opening command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening command setting process, the opening command specifying the type of the "jackpot symbol" determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. In addition, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is added to the value of the external information jackpot counter.
In step S13-7, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening pre-opening state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-8, it is determined whether the type of the stopped pattern is a "small win pattern" or not, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is a "small win pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-9, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is not a "small win pattern" (it is a "miss pattern") (No), the process proceeds to step S13-13.
In step S13-9, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a first special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol." In addition, in each first special electric role control table, the opening time, the effective time for closing the large winning hole, the closing time for the large winning hole, the ending time, the number of rounds (number of small winning games), the number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each round (small winning game), the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric role solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switch, the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the V-area solenoid 66 corresponding to each round (small winning game), etc. are specified.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the first special electric role control table corresponding to the type of “small winning pattern” determined in step S11-8 is read out, and the read out first special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S13-10, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer by referring to the first special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-11, an opening command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening command setting process, the opening command specifying the type of the "small winning symbol" determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-12, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening pre-opening state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-13, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230.

(First prize opening pre-processing)
Next, the pre-opening process for the first large prize opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the processing before the first large prize opening is opened.
When the first large prize opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S14-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, a special electric role continuous operation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric role continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter.
In step S14-3, a round start command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start command setting process, a round start command that specifies the start of a round corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric role open/close switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric role open/close switching count setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out the open/close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation count counter. The read open/close switching count is then set in the special electric role open/close switching count counter. Next, the value of the special electric role winning count counter is set to "0".
In step S14-5, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(First big prize opening control process)
Next, the first large prize opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the first large prize opening opening control process.
When the first large prize opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 49, the process first proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning count counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning count counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning count counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, the special prize opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the special prize opening control end process, the solenoid control data for specifying the power supply stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This causes the special electric device 53a to be controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, a special prize opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special prize opening closing effective time setting process, a predetermined special prize opening closing effective time (interval time) is set in the special game timer by referring to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S16-7, a round end command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end command setting process, a round end command that specifies the end of the round (small win game) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening closure valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(First big prize winning hole closing validity process)
Next, the first big prize opening closure validity process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the first large prize opening closure activation process.
When the first large prize opening closure activation process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 50, the process first proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached a specified value. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S17-9.
Here, by referring to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230, the number of rounds specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value and a judgment is made.
In step S17-3, it is determined whether the value set in the V prize flag area of RAM 230 is "1" or not, and if it is determined that the value set in the V prize flag area is "1" (Yes), it proceeds to step S17-4, and if it is determined that the value set in the V prize flag area is "0" (No), it proceeds to step S17-11.

In step S17-4, a game status update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-5. In the game status update process, the game status is updated.
Specifically, in the game status update process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the time-saving counter, and "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. This stops the time-saving control.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving control flag area is not set to "1" (is set to "0"), the process proceeds to the next step.

In step S17-5, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol." In addition, in each second special electric role control table, an opening time, a large prize opening closing effective time, a large prize opening closing time, an ending time, a number of rounds (number of round games), a number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each round (round game), and control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric role solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switch are specified.
In the special electric role control data setting process, a second special electric role control table (for a big win) corresponding to the type of "small win pattern" determined in step S11-5 is read out, and the read out second special electric role control table (for a big win) is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S17-6, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-7, an opening command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-8. In the opening command setting process, an opening command for specifying the start of a big win gaming state is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-8, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening pre-opening state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-9, a special prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-10. In the special prize opening closing time setting process, a predetermined special prize opening closing time is set in the special game timer by referring to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-10, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening pre-opening state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-11, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-12. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer by referring to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-12, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-13. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command designating the end of the small win gaming state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-13, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening end waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Wait processing for the end of the first large prize opening)
Next, the first large prize opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the completion of the opening of the first large prize opening.
When the first large prize opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 51, the process first proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S18-2, a V non-winning command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the V non-winning command setting process, the V non-winning command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Pre-opening process for the second prize winning hole)
Next, the pre-opening process for the second large prize opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 52 is a flowchart showing the processing before the second large prize opening is opened.
When the second large prize opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S40-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S40-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S40-2, a special electric role continuous operation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the special electric role continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter.
In step S40-3, a round start command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the round start command setting process, a round start command that specifies the start of a round corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.

In step S40-4, a special electric role open/close switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the special electric role open/close switching count setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read the open/close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation count counter. The read open/close switching count is then set in the special electric role open/close switching count counter.
Next, the value of the special electric winning number counter is set to "0."
In step S40-5, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S40-6, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Second large prize opening control process)
Next, the second large prize opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the second large prize opening opening control process.
When the second large prize opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 53, it first proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S41-4.
In step S41-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S41-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5.
In step S41-3, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S41-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 8 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S41-5, the special prize opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-6. In the special prize opening control end process, the solenoid control data for specifying the power supply stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This causes the special electric role 53a to be controlled to the closed state.
In step S41-6, a special prize opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-7. In the special prize opening closing effective time setting process, a predetermined special prize opening closing effective time (interval time) is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S41-7, a round end command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-8. In the round end command setting process, a round end command that specifies the end of a round of play is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S41-8, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening closure valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Second big prize winning hole closing effective process)
Next, the second big prize opening closure validity process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 54 is a flowchart showing the second large prize opening closure activation process.
When the second large prize opening closure activation process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 54, the process first proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S42-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached a specified value. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S42-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S42-6.
Here, by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230, the number of rounds of play specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value and a judgment is made.

In step S42-3, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-4, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-5. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command designating the end of the big win gaming state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S42-5, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening end waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-6, a special prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-7. In the special prize opening closing time setting process, a predetermined special prize opening closing time is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-7, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening pre-opening state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Wait processing for the end of the second large prize opening)
Next, the second large prize opening end waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 55 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the completion of the second large prize opening.
When the second large prize opening completion wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 55, the process first proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S43-2, a game status setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-3. In the game status setting process, a game status is set.
Specifically, in the game status setting process, first, the type of the stopped pattern ("big win pattern" or "small win pattern") and the game status at the time when the start determination is executed are confirmed.
Then, if a "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") is won as a result of a start judgment executed while the time-saving control is stopped, the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "1", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "5", and the value of the third time-saving counter is set to "1".
On the other hand, if a "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") is won as a result of a start judgment performed during execution of the time-saving control, the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "12", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "16", and the value of the third time-saving counter is set to "1".
On the other hand, if a "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2") is won as a result of a start judgment performed while the time-saving control is stopped, the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "100", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "100", and the value of the third time-saving counter is set to "1".
On the other hand, if a "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2") is won as a result of the start judgment performed during execution of the time-saving control, the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "12", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "16", and the value of the third time-saving counter is set to "1".
On the other hand, if "jackpot 3"("jackpot pattern 3") is won, regardless of the game state at the time the start determination is performed, the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "100", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "100", and the value of the third time-saving counter is set to "1".
On the other hand, if a "small win 1" to "small win 3"("small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 3") is won, regardless of the game state at the time the start determination is executed, the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "12", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "16", and the value of the third time-saving counter is set to "1".
In the game state setting process, next, "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. This starts the time-saving control. Also, "0" is set in the V-winning flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S43-3, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230.

(Special electric service opening and closing switching process)
Next, the special electric utility opening/closing switching process of steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3 will be described.
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special electric service opening/closing switching process.
When the special electric service opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3, as shown in FIG. 56, the process first proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S15-2. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4).
In step S15-2, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric role 53a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control data setting process, the first special electric role control table or the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switching count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or stop energizing) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, based on the set solenoid data, control of the special electric role solenoid 65 is started, and the special electric role 53a is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S15-3, a special electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switch count counter is read out by referring to the first special electric role control table or the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special electric service opening/closing switching count counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4). In the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter.

(Regular game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process in step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
Here, in this embodiment, seven situations/stages (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phases") of a game executed based on a normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") are defined: "normal symbol change waiting state", "normal symbol changing state", "normal symbol stop symbol display state", "normal symbol electric device pre-opening state", "normal symbol electric device opening control state", "normal symbol electric device closure active state" and "normal symbol electric device opening end waiting state".
Then, in a normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
In addition, the ROM 220 stores normal game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) normal games, which correspond to each normal game phase.
In the normal game management process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 57, the process first proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, a value (normal game phase) set in a normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read out.

In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, a process based on the normal game control module read out in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal map change waiting state", the normal map change waiting process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal map changing state", the normal map changing process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal map stopped pattern display state", the normal map stopped process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature pre-opening state", the normal electric feature pre-opening process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature opening control state", the normal electric feature opening control process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature closing effective state", the normal electric feature closing effective process described below is started; and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature opening end wait state", the normal electric feature opening end wait process described below is started.

(Waiting for normal chart changes)
Next, the normal map change waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for map changes.
When the map change waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 58, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the regular map reservation counter is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S20-2. If it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is not "1" or greater (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S20-2, a process for updating the number of reserved ordinary maps is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the process for updating the number of reserved ordinary maps, the number of reserved ordinary maps is updated.
Specifically, in the regular map pending number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the regular map pending number counter.
Next, the memory area in which the regular game information is stored is shifted. Specifically, the memory contents of memory area 1 of the regular game information memory area are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 of the regular game information memory area are shifted to memory area 1 of the regular game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 of the regular game information memory area are shifted to memory area 2 of the regular game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 of the regular game information memory area are shifted to memory area 3 of the regular game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 of the regular game information memory area are cleared (initialized).

In step S20-3, a normal symbol winning/losing determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal symbol winning/losing determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (normal symbol winning/losing determination).
A normal symbol winning/losing lottery table in which winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the normal symbol winning/losing lottery table, a normal symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is being executed and a normal symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is stopped are stored.
In this embodiment, the winning values are registered in the regular winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is stopped and the regular winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is being executed so that the winning probability is the same (in this embodiment, 65535/65536).
In the normal winning/losing determination process, a normal winning/losing determination is performed based on the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and a normal winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (running or stopped) of the time-saving control.
Specifically, if the value of the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the winning value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is judged to be a "win" (a prize).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is judged to be a "miss" (lost).

In step S20-4, a normal stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal winning/losing determination process, if the normal winning/losing determination determines that the winning symbol is a "win" (a prize), the type of the winning symbol (winning symbol number) is determined to be a "normal winning symbol."
On the other hand, if the normal winning/losing judgment results in a "lose" (failure), the type of stopping pattern (stopping pattern number) is judged to be a "losing pattern."
Next, the type of the determined stop symbol (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S20-5, a normal pattern variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal pattern variation pattern determination process, the type of the normal pattern variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time-saving control is stopped, the first type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to a fluctuation time of 4.0 [s]) is determined as the type (fluctuation pattern number) of the normal map fluctuation pattern.
On the other hand, when time-saving control is being executed, the second type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to a fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is determined as the type (fluctuation pattern number) of the normal fluctuation pattern.

In step S20-6, a normal game variable time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal game variable time setting process, a variable time corresponding to the type of normal game variable pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is obtained. The obtained variable time is then set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a general map change display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general map change display data setting process, data for controlling the change display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the general map change display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the general map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal map display pattern counter. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segments corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter are controlled to be lit.
Next, a predetermined segment data is set as the segment data corresponding to the map display device. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the map display device, the segments corresponding to the set segment data are controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during normal map fluctuations)
Next, the normal map change process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map fluctuation.
When the normal map fluctuation processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 59, the process first proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the general map display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-3, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S21-3, a general map change display data update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the general map change display data update process, data for controlling the change display of the general map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the regular map variation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the regular map display pattern counter.

In step S21-4, a general map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the general map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol memory area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Next, the acquired stop pattern number is set as the value of the normal map display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter is controlled to light up (stop display).
In step S21-5, a normal game stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal game stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during normal map suspension)
Next, the normal map stop processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map stop.
When the normal map stop processing is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S22-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern" or not, and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is not a "normal winning pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3, and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-4, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the normal electric role 52a is set.
A normal electric control table corresponding to the execution status (executing or stopped) of the time-saving control is stored in the ROM 220. Each normal electric control table specifies the time before the normal electric open, the effective time for closing the normal electric, the waiting time for the end of the open, the number of times of opening and closing, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) corresponding to each opening and closing.
In the normal electric control data setting process, a normal electric control table corresponding to the execution status (ongoing or stopped) of the time-saving control is read out, and the read normal electric control table is set in the normal electric control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the number of times of switching is read by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the number of times of switching is read and set in the normal electric role switching number counter. Also, the value of the normal electric role winning number counter is set to "0".

In step S22-5, a normal electric role release time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric role release time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined normal electric role release time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S22-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory opening state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Pre-processing for opening normal electric devices)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 61 is a flowchart showing the processing before opening normal electric parts.
When the normal electric feature opening pre-processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 61, the process first proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S23-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, a normal electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric utility opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric service switching process)
Next, the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process of steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the normal electric service opening and closing switching process.
When the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 62, first, the process proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S24-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4).
In step S24-2, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric role 52a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control data setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switching count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or stop energizing) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This starts the control of the normal electric role solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data, and the normal electric role 52a is controlled to be in an open or closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switching count counter is read out by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, a normal electric service opening/closing switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is set as a new normal electric service opening/closing switching counter.

(Normal electric feature release control process)
Next, the normal electric feature release control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 63 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature release control process.
When the normal electric feature release control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 63, it first proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-3. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, normal electric service opening and closing switching processing (see FIG. 62) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, a normal electric component opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric component opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying the de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normal electric component 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, a normal electric role closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal electric role closing effective time setting process, a normal electric role closing effective time is set in the normal game timer by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closing valid state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric device closure effective processing)
Next, the normal electric feature closure validity process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 64 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature closure activation process.
When the normal electric feature closure activation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 64, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S26-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, the open end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the open end wait time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined open end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric device release end wait processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of normal electric feature opening.
When the normal electric feature release end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 65, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S27-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Performance display device control process)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device control process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, the process proceeds to step S38-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S38-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, a total-out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not incremented.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not a predetermined gaming state is being reached, and if it is determined that the predetermined gaming state is being reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and if it is determined that the predetermined gaming state is not being reached (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined gaming state" is a gaming state in which the time-saving control is stopped and a jackpot gaming state is not occurring.
In step S38-5, a normal out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal out counter is not incremented.

In step S38-6, normal prize ball counter addition processing is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added with "4", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the first start port 51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is increased by "1", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the second start port 52. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not increased.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the actuation port switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the actuation port switch 104 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "1", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to a game ball entering the actuation port 54. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the actuation port switch 104 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the other winning port switch 106 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the other winning port switch 106 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "10", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of game balls into the other winning ports 55a to 55e. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the other winning port switch 106 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether the value of the total out counter has reached a reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-8, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value is 60000×n (n=integer), where “n” is a value indicating the current interval, and is initially set to “1”.
In step S38-8, a section update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in base value buffer 1 of RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to base value buffer 2 of RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current interval, thereby updating the reference value.
In step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal winning ball counter. The calculated base ratio is then stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, a base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 includes a discrimination segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, it is selected which base ratio is to be displayed, the base ratio for the current section or the base ratio for the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that this is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "b," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the units digit of the current base ratio.

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that this is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "c" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "c," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the units digit of the current base ratio.

In step S38-11, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S38-1 (the register values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S38-1 (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) are restored.
In step S38-12, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. This allows the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like.

(Processing executed on the performance control board 300)
Next, the processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.

(Sub-CPU initialization process)
First, the sub-CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
A reset circuit (not shown) is provided on the performance control board 300. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the reset circuit generates a reset signal.
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 starts a sub-CPU initialization process (not shown) in response to the generation of a reset signal by the reset circuit.
In the sub-CPU initialization process, various registers, timers, etc. used by the CPU 310 are initialized to initialize the CPU 310. Next, a random number update process for updating various random numbers for performance is executed. After that, the random number update process for performance is executed repeatedly until various interrupt processes described later are executed.

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control board 200.
In the command reception interrupt processing, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored in the reception buffer area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300.

(Sub timer interrupt processing)
Next, the sub timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the sub timer interrupt process.
The performance control board 300 includes a clock generating circuit. The clock generating circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 starts the sub timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 67 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of a clock pulse by the clock generating circuit. When the sub timer interrupt process starts, the process first proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register save process, the register values are saved to a save area in the DRAM 304.

In step S31-2, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, the values of various timers (such as performance scenario timers) equipped in the performance control board 300 are updated. Specifically, a predetermined value (a value corresponding to a predetermined period) is added or subtracted from the values of the various timers.
In step S31-3, a command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the reception buffer of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300 is analyzed, and a process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, a time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of the presentation is managed based on the presentation scenario data set in the presentation scenario setting area and the value of the presentation scenario timer corresponding to the presentation scenario data.
Specifically, in the time schedule management process, for each rendering scenario data set in the rendering scenario setting area, it is determined whether or not there is process data whose start time has arrived. If it is determined that there is process data whose start time has arrived, each command information (message) included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, command information regarding the display performance (command information for specifying the start of the display performance, command information for specifying the end of the display performance, etc.) is stored in a display command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information relating to sound performance (such as command information for specifying the start of sound performance) is stored in a sound command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information regarding lamp performance (such as command information for specifying the start of a lamp performance) is stored in a lamp command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information regarding the movable body performance (such as command information specifying the start of the movable body performance) is stored in a movable body command buffer area.

In step S31-5, the register restoration process is executed, and the sub timer interrupt process is terminated. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S31-1 are restored.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S32-1, a setting value command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the setting value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a setting value designation command has been received. If it is determined that a setting value designation command has been received, a value corresponding to the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is stored (set) in the setting value storage area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300.

In step S32-2, a game status command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command has been received. If it is determined that a game state designation command has been received, various effect flags are set.
In step S32-3, a hold command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4, which will be described later.
In step S32-4, a read-ahead command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5, which will be described later.
In step S32-5, a variable command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6, which will be described later.
In step S32-6, a stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7, which will be described later.
In step S32-7, an opening command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8, which will be described later.

In step S32-8, a game play status command receiving process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4).
In the game status command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a game status designation command has been received. If it is determined that the game status designation command has been received, a game status setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game status designation command has not been received, the game status setting process is not executed and the process proceeds to the next step (step S31-4).
In the game play status setting process, the game play status designation command is analyzed.
Then, when the occurrence of the ready-to-fire state is specified by the game status specification command, a value (for example, "1") specifying that the ready-to-fire state is occurring is set in the game status flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. Also, a performance is started that suggests (notifies) that the ready-to-fire state is occurring.
On the other hand, when the release of the ready-to-fire state is specified by the game status specification command, a value (for example, "0") specifying that the ready-to-fire state is being released is set in the game status flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. Also, the performance suggesting (notifying) that the ready-to-fire state is occurring is terminated.

(Pending command reception process)
Next, the pending command receiving process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the pending command receiving process.
When the hold command receiving process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command has been received. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether the pending number specification command specifies an increase in the pending number (the pending number has increased by "1"), and if it is determined that the pending number specification command specifies an increase in the pending number (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and if it is determined that the pending number specification command does not specify an increase in the pending number (specifies that the pending number has decreased by "1") (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the reserved number addition process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reserved number addition process, first, it is determined whether the reserved number designation command designates an increase in the reserved number of special chart 1.
Then, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates an increase in the reserved number of special chart 1, the value set in the reserved number counter of special chart 1 is added with "1" and set as a new reserved number counter of special chart 1. Also, a normal reserved performance corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special chart 1 game information is started.
At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved pattern h, among the four display positions included in the reserved pattern display area b2, a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 1 game information is stored is set. Here, the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 1 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the reserved number counter for special pattern 1.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserved number designation command specifies an increase in the reserved number of special chart 2, the value set in the reserved number counter of special chart 2 plus "1" is set in the reserved number counter of special chart 2. In addition, a normal reserved performance corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special chart 2 game information is started.
At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved pattern h, among the four display positions included in the reserved pattern display area b3, a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 2 game information is stored is set. Here, the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 2 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special pattern 2 reserved number counter.

In step S36-4, a pending number subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reserved number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether the reserved number specification command specifies subtraction of the reserved number of special chart 1.
Then, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates the subtraction of the reserved number of special drawing 1, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the reserved number counter of special drawing 1 is newly set in the reserved number counter of special drawing 1. Also, the display position of each reserved pattern h displayed in the reserved pattern display area b2 is shifted (moved).
Specifically, the reserved effect corresponding to the reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1 is ended. This ends the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the ended reserved effect.
In addition, when a reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 1 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the reserved pattern display area b2 (the display position corresponding to memory area 1) to the reserved pattern display area b1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 2 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 2 to the display position corresponding to memory area 1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 3 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 3 to the display position corresponding to memory area 2.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 4 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 4 to the display position corresponding to memory area 3.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates the subtraction of the reserved number of special figures 2, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the reserved number counter of special figures 2 is newly set in the reserved number counter of special figures 2. Also, the display position of each reserved pattern h displayed in the reserved pattern display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the reserved effect corresponding to the reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1 is ended. This ends the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the ended reserved effect.
In addition, when a reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 1 in the reserved pattern display area b3, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the reserved pattern display area b3 (the display position corresponding to memory area 1) to the reserved pattern display area b1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 2 in the reserved pattern display area b3, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 2 to the display position corresponding to memory area 1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 3 in the reserved pattern display area b3, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 3 to the display position corresponding to memory area 2.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 4 in the reserved pattern display area b3, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 4 to the display position corresponding to memory area 3.

(Read-ahead command reception processing)
Next, the read-ahead command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the read-ahead command reception process.
When the read-ahead command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a read-ahead designation command (first read-ahead designation command, second read-ahead designation command, and third read-ahead designation command) has been received, and if it is determined that a read-ahead designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-2, and if it is determined that a read-ahead designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, a look-ahead information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information designated by the look-ahead designation command is stored as reserved information in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300.
A reserved information storage area capable of storing reserved information is set in the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. In addition, as the reserved information storage area, a first reserved information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 game information storage area of the RAM 230) and a second reserved information storage area corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 game information storage area of the RAM 230) are set.
The first reserved information storage area includes storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing reserved information. The first reserved information storage area stores reserved information corresponding to the special chart 1 game information stored in the special chart 1 game information storage area. That is, the reserved information stored in storage area 1 of the first reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in storage area 1 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 2 of the first reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in storage area 2 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 3 of the first reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in storage area 3 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 4 of the first reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in storage area 4 of the special chart 1 game information storage area.
The second reserved information storage area includes storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing reserved information. The second reserved information storage area stores reserved information corresponding to the special chart 2 game information stored in the special chart 2 game information storage area. That is, the reserved information stored in storage area 1 of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in storage area 1 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 2 of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in storage area 2 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 3 of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in storage area 3 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 4 of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in storage area 4 of the special chart 2 game information storage area.
Each pending information includes pattern information indicating the type of stopping pattern, first variation information indicating the content of the variation mode ("variation mode number" or "indefinite value"), and second variation information indicating the content of the variation pattern ("variation pattern number" or "indefinite value").

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command ("miss symbol" or "jackpot p symbol"), the content of the fluctuation mode designated by the second look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation mode m" or "indefinite value"), and the content of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation pattern n" or "indefinite value") are analyzed, and reserved information is generated that includes symbol information corresponding to the analyzed type of the stop symbol, first fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation mode, and second fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation pattern.Then, the generated reserved information is stored (saved) in the first reserved information storage area.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command ("miss symbol" or "jackpot p symbol"), the content of the fluctuation mode designated by the second look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation mode m" or "indefinite value"), and the content of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation pattern n" or "indefinite value") are analyzed, and reserved information is generated that includes symbol information corresponding to the analyzed type of the stop symbol, first fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation mode, and second fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation pattern.Then, the generated reserved information is stored (saved) in the second reserved information storage area.
In the following description, the pending information stored in the pending information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as “pre-read pending information.” In addition, among the pending information stored in the first pending information storage area, the pending information for which notification display (variable display and stationary display) is executed before the pending information to be pre-read is referred to as “advancing pending information.”

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading preview performance is being executed, and if it is determined that a pre-reading preview performance is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4, and if it is determined that a pre-reading preview performance is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, while the pre-reading preview performance is being executed, "1" is set in the pre-reading preview performance in-progress flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading preview performance is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading preview performance in-progress flag area.
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are met, and if it is determined that the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and if it is determined that the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are not met (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, it is determined that the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are met when all of the following conditions are met: (1) a predetermined number (in this embodiment, "2") or more of advance pending information is stored, (2) there is no advance pending information indicating a type (fluctuation pattern number) belonging to "normal reach fluctuation" or "super reach fluctuation" as a fluctuation pattern type, and (3) a jackpot game state is not occurring.
The contents of the pre-reading notice performance execution conditions can be changed as appropriate. That is, it is acceptable to have a configuration in which it is determined that the pre-reading notice performance execution conditions are met when one or more of the above conditions (1) to (3) are met, rather than all of the above conditions (1) to (3). In addition, the pre-reading notice performance execution conditions may include other conditions different from the above conditions (1) to (3). As the other conditions, for example, it is possible to specify that (4) the pre-reading target reserved information is reserved information corresponding to the special chart 1 game information, (5) the time-saving control is stopped, etc.

In step S33-5, a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the pre-reading advance notice performance lottery process, a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery is executed to determine whether or not the pre-reading advance notice performance is executed.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery table in which winning values of the pre-reading advance notice performance lottery are registered.
In the pre-reading notice performance lottery process, first, the reserved notice appearance designation information stored in the reserved notice appearance designation information setting area is confirmed. Then, if non-appearance designation information is set in the reserved notice appearance designation information setting area, the pre-reading notice performance lottery is not executed (it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice performance). On the other hand, if appearance designation information is set in the reserved notice appearance designation information setting area, the pre-reading notice performance lottery is executed.
In the pre-reading notice performance lottery, first, a pre-reading notice performance lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the obtained pre-reading notice performance lottery random number and the pre-reading notice performance lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice performance. At this time, if the obtained pre-reading notice performance lottery random number matches the winning value (win), it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice performance, and if the obtained pre-reading notice performance lottery random number does not match the winning value (lose), it is determined not to execute the pre-reading notice performance.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading preview performance lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won. If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance lottery has been won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7. If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance lottery has been lost (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-7, a pre-reading advance notice effect setting process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the pre-reading advance notice effect setting process, the contents of the pre-reading advance notice effect (hold advance notice effect) are set.
Specifically, in the pre-reading preview performance setting process, first, a reserved final mode selection process is executed. In the reserved final mode selection process, a reserved final mode is selected and set.
"Final reserved state" refers to the state of the reserved pattern hy that is the subject of the notice and that ultimately changes during the reserved notice performance.
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a reserve final color lottery table in which the correspondence between the reserve final mode lottery random numbers and the reserve final modes is registered.
In addition, a reservation final mode lottery table corresponding to each type of fluctuation pattern is stored as a reservation final mode lottery table.
In the reserved final mode selection process, first, a reserved final mode selection random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the type of the variation pattern indicated by the reserved information to be read ahead is confirmed, and the reserved final mode selection table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the acquired reserved final mode selection random number and the read reserved final mode selection table, the reserved final mode is selected (determined).

In the pre-reading advance notice performance setting process, next, a reserved change trigger selection process is executed. In the reserved change trigger selection process, a reserved change trigger is selected and set.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a reserve change trigger lottery table in which the correspondence between the reserve change trigger lottery random numbers and the reserve change patterns is registered.
"Pending change pattern" is information (scenario data) that specifies a combination of pending change triggers.
In addition, a reserve change trigger lottery table corresponding to each combination of the special chart 1 reserve number ("2" to "4") and the reserve final state is stored as a reserve change trigger lottery table.
In the reservation change opportunity selection process, first, a reservation change opportunity lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the reservation number of the special chart 1 and the reservation final mode selected in the reservation final mode selection process are confirmed, and the reservation change opportunity lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the acquired reservation change opportunity lottery random number and the read reservation change opportunity lottery table, a reservation notice performance number is determined (determined). Then, the performance scenario data corresponding to the determined reservation notice performance number is read, and the read performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario area.

In the pre-reading advance notice performance setting process, next, a reserved change content selection process is executed. In the reserved change content selection process, reserved change content corresponding to each reserved change trigger is selected and set.
Specifically, in the reserved change content selection process, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be predicted before the change and the state of the reserved pattern hy to be predicted after the change are set as the reserved change content corresponding to each reserved change trigger.
In this embodiment, of the one or more hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger selection process, the hold change content corresponding to each hold change trigger is selected in order from the hold change trigger that arrives (occurs) later (later hold change trigger).
For example, if three hold change triggers are set in the hold change trigger selection process, the hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger are selected in the following order: the third (final) hold change trigger, the second hold change trigger, and the first hold change trigger.
In addition, when selecting the reserved change contents corresponding to each reserved change trigger, first, the state of the reserved pattern hy after the change is selected, and then the state of the reserved pattern hy before the change is selected. At this time, as the state of the reserved pattern hy before the change, a state with a lower expectation is determined compared with the state of the reserved pattern hy after the change. As a result, in response to the arrival of each reserved change trigger, the state of the reserved pattern hy with the predicted target is changed (promoted) to a state with a higher expectation.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a reserved change content selection table in which the correspondence between the reserved change content selection random number and the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change is registered.
In addition, a reserved change content selection table corresponding to each state of the reserved pattern h (the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change) is stored as a reserved change content selection table.
In the reserved change content lottery table corresponding to each state of the reserved pattern h (the state of the predicted reserved pattern hy after the change), only states of the predicted reserved pattern hy before the change that have a lower expectation level compared to the state of the predicted reserved pattern hy after the change are registered.
In the reserved change content selection process, first, the reserved change content is selected for the last reserved change trigger among the reserved change triggers set in the reserved change trigger selection process. For this, first, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change related to the reserved change trigger of the last time is selected. At this time, the reserved final state selected in the reserved final state selection process is selected as the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change related to the reserved change trigger of the last time. Next, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change related to the reserved change trigger of the last time is selected. For this, first, a reserved change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, a reserved change content lottery table corresponding to the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change selected for the reserved change trigger of the last time is read. Then, based on the reserved change content lottery random number obtained and the reserved change content lottery table read, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change related to the reserved change trigger of the last time is selected.
In the reservation change content selection process, next, the reservation change content is selected for each reservation change trigger, excluding the last reservation change trigger, from among the reservation change triggers set in the reservation change trigger selection process. At this time, the reservation change content corresponding to each reservation change trigger is determined in order from the reservation change trigger that arrives last.
To determine the reserved change contents corresponding to each reserved change trigger, first, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change related to the reserved change trigger is determined. At this time, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change already selected for the next reserved change trigger is selected as the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change related to the current reserved change trigger. Next, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change related to the current reserved change trigger is determined. For this, first, a reserved change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, a reserved change content lottery table corresponding to the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change selected for the current reserved change trigger is read. Then, based on the reserved change content lottery random number obtained and the reserved change content lottery table read, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change related to the current reserved change trigger is selected.
In the reserved change content selection process, the reserved change content selected for each reserved change opportunity is then set in the area corresponding to the reserved change opportunity in the performance scenario setting area. As a result, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified changes (promotion) according to the reserved change content set for the reserved change opportunity in response to the arrival of each reserved change opportunity.

In the pre-reading preview performance setting process, next, the pre-reading preview performance in progress flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300 is set to "1".
This will start the on-hold notice presentation.
In addition, through processing not shown, the pre-reading preview performance flag area is set to "0" upon the end of the hold preview performance.

(Variation command reception process)
Next, the variable command receiving process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the variable command receiving process.
When the variable command receiving process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a specified control command has been received. If it is determined that the specified control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2. If it is determined that the specified control command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control commands refer to a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, a stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (a mode of the stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (a mode of the stop effect) is determined based on the type of the stop pattern specified by the pattern type designation command. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in a stop effect number storage area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.

In step S34-3, a variable performance determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variable performance determination process, a variable performance number (a mode of the variable performance) is determined.
Specifically, in the variable performance determination process, first, a first half variable performance determination process is executed to determine a first half variable performance number (aspect of the first half variable performance).
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a first half variable performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the variable mode number (type of variable mode) and the first half variable performance number (form of first half variable performance) is registered.
In the first half variable performance determination process, first, a first half variable performance selection table is read. Then, a first half variable performance number corresponding to the variable mode number designated by the variable mode designation command is determined (selected) from among the first half variable performance numbers registered in the first half variable performance selection table.

In the variable performance determination process, next, a second half variable performance determination process is executed to determine a second half variable performance number (a mode of the second half variable performance).
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a second half variable performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the variable pattern number (type of variable pattern) and the second half variable performance number (mode of second half variable performance) is registered.
In the latter half variable performance determination process, first, a latter half variable performance selection table is read out. Then, a latter half variable performance number corresponding to the variable pattern number designated by the variable pattern designation command is determined (selected) from the latter half variable performance numbers registered in the latter half variable performance selection table.

In step S34-4, a preview performance determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the preview performance determination process, a main preview performance number (the mode of the main preview performance) is selected.
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a preview performance lottery table in which the correspondence between preview performance lottery random numbers and main preview performance numbers (modes of main preview performance) is registered.
In addition, as a preview performance lottery table, a preview performance lottery table corresponding to each stopping pattern number (each type of stopping pattern) is stored.
To determine the mode of the main preview performance, first, a preview performance selection random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, the stop symbol number specified by the stop symbol designation command is confirmed, and the preview performance selection table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, the main preview performance number is determined (determined) based on the obtained preview performance selection random number and the read preview performance selection table.

In step S34-5, a variable performance setting process is executed, and the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable performance setting process, performance scenario data for the variable performance is set.
Specifically, in the variable performance setting process, the performance scenario data corresponding to the first half variable performance number determined in step S34-3 and the performance scenario data corresponding to the second half variable performance number determined in step S34-3 are read out.
Next, the read-out rendering scenario data is synthesized to generate rendering scenario data relating to variable rendering. Then, the generated rendering scenario data and a rendering scenario timer corresponding to the rendering scenario data are set in a rendering scenario setting area.
In addition, the performance scenario data corresponding to the main preview performance number determined in step S34-4 is read out. Then, the read performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario setting area. This causes the main preview performance to start at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable performance.

(Stop command reception process)
Next, the stop command reception process in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, the process proceeds to step S35-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received. If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2. If it is determined that a stop command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, a stop effect start process is executed, and the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect start process, effect scenario data for the stop effect is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area is acquired, and the effect scenario data corresponding to the acquired stop effect number is read out. Then, the read-out effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. This starts the stop effect (stop display of the effect patterns z1 and z2).

(Opening command reception process)
Next, the opening command receiving process in step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the opening command receiving process.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, the process proceeds to step S39-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that an opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2. If it is determined that an opening designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
In step S39-2, a winning effect setting process is executed, and the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the winning effect setting process, effect scenario data for the winning effect is set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, a winning effect number is selected according to the type of the stop symbol specified by the opening designation command. Also, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected winning effect number is read out. Then, the read out effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. This starts the winning effect.

(Function of Pachinko Machine 1)
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game board 11ab having a design layer (cell sheet 11b) on the front surface thereof that forms a design, game ball guide members (left structure B1, right structure B2, upper structure B3, and lower structure B4) provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab, and a display means (display screen 31a) provided on the rear surface of the game board 11ab. The game board 11ab also has a first opening (opening PH1) that allows the display means to be viewed. The game ball guide members also include an eleventh game ball guide member (e.g., left structure B1) and a twelfth game ball guide member (e.g., upper structure B3) that guide the game ball so that it does not enter the first opening. The eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member cover the front end of the first opening so that the game ball does not contact the front end of the first opening. In addition, a predetermined gap (for example, gap G1) through which the front end of the first opening is exposed is provided between the eleventh game ball guiding member and the twelfth game ball guiding member, and the game ball cannot contact the front end of the first opening through the predetermined gap.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the front end of the first opening is covered by the 11th game ball guiding member and the 12th game ball guiding member so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the first opening. This makes it possible to press the front end (periphery) of the first opening with the back surface of the 11th game ball guiding member and the 12th game ball guiding member, thereby suppressing peeling of the design layer.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball cannot come into contact with the front end (periphery) of the first opening through the gap between the eleventh game ball guiding member and the twelfth game ball guiding member. This makes it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer caused by contact of the game ball in the gap between the eleventh game ball guiding member and the twelfth game ball guiding portion.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the design layer from peeling off from the game board.

The pachinko machine 1 also includes a game board 11ab having a design layer (cell sheet 11b) on the front surface thereof that forms a design, and game ball guide members (left structure B1, right structure B2, upper structure B3, lower structure B4, other winning hole structure B5, starting hole structure B6, etc.) provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab. The game board 11ab also has a second opening (openings PH3 to PH6) through which the game ball can pass. The game ball guide members also include a 21st game ball guide member (other winning hole structure B5) that guides the game ball to flow into the second opening. The 21st game ball guide member covers the front end of the second opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with a predetermined lower part (covering part) of the front end of the second opening.
This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 1 while preventing the design layer from peeling off from the game board 11ab.
That is, when only considering the prevention of peeling of the design layer from the game board 11ab, it is preferable to configure the entire front end (periphery) of the second opening to be covered by the 21st game ball guide member. However, if the entire front end (periphery) of the second opening is configured to be covered by the 21st game ball guide member, the configuration of the 21st game ball guide member becomes complicated, and the amount of material required to configure the 21st game ball guide member increases, resulting in increased manufacturing costs.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the 21st game ball guide member covers the front end of the second opening so that the game ball does not contact a predetermined lower part of the front end of the second opening. That is, a part of the front end (periphery) of the second opening is covered by the 21st game ball guide member. This simplifies the configuration of the 21st game ball guide member and reduces the amount of material required to configure the 21st game ball guide member, making it possible to reduce manufacturing costs.
Here, if a specific portion of the front end (periphery) of the second opening is simply not covered by the 21st game ball guide member, there is a risk that the design layer will peel off in that specific portion due to contact with the game ball.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a predetermined lower portion of the front end (periphery) of the second opening is covered by the 21st game ball guide member so that the game ball does not come into contact with it. In other words, a predetermined upper portion (non-covered portion NC) of the front end (periphery) of the second opening is not covered by the 21st game ball guide member so that the game ball can come into contact with it. As a result, the front end (periphery) of the rolled-up design layer at the predetermined upper portion is pressed down by the weight of the game ball flowing into the ball entrance, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs while preventing the design layer from peeling off from the game board.

The pachinko machine 1 also includes a game board 11ab having a design layer (cell sheet 11b) on the front surface thereof that forms a design, and a display means (fourth symbol display device 61) provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab. The game board 11ab also has a third opening (opening PH2) through which a harness (electric wire) extending from the display means is inserted. The display means covers the entire opening edge (front end) of the third opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the opening edge (front end) of the third opening.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the display means covers the entire front end of the third opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the third opening. This makes it possible to press the entire front end (periphery) of the third opening against the back surface of the display means and to suppress peeling of the design layer.

The pachinko machine 1 also includes a game board 11ab having a design layer (cell sheet 11b) on the front surface thereof that forms a design, and a winning device (composite winning device 70) provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab. The game board 11ab also has a fourth opening (opening PH7) that allows the game ball that entered the winning device to pass through. The winning device covers the entire opening edge (front end) of the fourth opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the opening edge (front end) of the fourth opening.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the entire front end of the fourth opening is covered by the winning device so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the fourth opening. As a result, the entire front end (periphery) of the fourth opening is pressed down by the back surface of the winning device, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.

The pachinko machine 1 also includes a game board 11ab having a design layer (cell sheet 11b) on the front surface thereof that forms a design, and a game ball guide member provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab. The game board 11ab also has a fifth opening (opening PH8). The game ball guide member also includes a 51st game ball guide member (starting hole structure B6) that guides the game ball to pass through the fifth opening. The 51st game ball guide member covers the entire opening edge (front end) of the fifth opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the opening edge (front end) of the fifth opening.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the 51st game ball guide member covers the entire front end of the 5th opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the 5th opening. As a result, the entire front end (periphery) of the 5th opening is pressed down by the back surface of the 51st game ball guide member, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.

The pachinko machine 1 includes a game board 11ab having a design layer (cell sheet 11b) on the front surface thereof that forms a design, and a game ball guide member provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab. The game board 11ab also has a sixth opening (opening PH9). The game ball guide member includes a 61st game ball guide member (starting hole structure B6) and a 62nd game ball guide member (inner rail 12) that guide the game ball to pass through the sixth opening. The 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member cover the front end of the sixth opening so that the game ball does not contact the front end of the sixth opening. A gap G4 is provided between the 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member, through which the front end of the sixth opening is exposed. The game ball cannot contact the front end of the sixth opening through the gap G4.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the front end of the sixth opening is covered by the 61st game ball guiding member and the 62nd game ball guiding member so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the sixth opening. As a result, the front end (periphery) of the sixth opening is pressed down by the back surfaces of the 61st game ball guiding member and the 62nd game ball guiding member, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball cannot come into contact with the front end (periphery) of the sixth opening from the gap G4 between the 61st game ball guiding member and the 62nd game ball guiding member. This makes it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer caused by contact of the game ball in the gap G4 between the 61st game ball guiding member and the 62nd game ball guiding member.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the design layer from peeling off from the game board.

(Modification)
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiment.
For example, in the above embodiment, the design layer according to the present invention is composed of the cell sheet 11b. That is, the cell sheet 11b is attached to the front surface (front face) of the substrate 11a, so that the design layer is provided on the front surface (front face) of the game substrate 11ab.
However, the design layer according to the present invention may be made of paint, coating, or ink. That is, the design may be drawn on the front surface of the board 11a with paint, coating, or ink, so that the design layer is provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab.

In the above embodiment, the first opening according to the present invention is constituted by the opening PH1. That is, it has an eleventh game ball guide member and a twelfth game ball guide member that guide the game ball so as not to enter the opening PH1 that allows the display screen 31a to be viewed. Also, the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member cover the front end of the opening PH1 so that the game ball does not contact the front end of the opening PH1. Furthermore, a gap G1 is provided between the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member, through which the front end of the opening PH1 is exposed. And, the game ball cannot contact the front end of the opening PH1 from the gap G1.
However, the first opening of the present invention may also be composed of other openings (opening PH2 for placing the fourth pattern display device 61, openings PH3 to PH6 which constitute the other winning openings 55a to 55e, opening PH7 for placing the composite winning device 70, opening PH8 which constitutes the first starting opening 51, opening PH9 which constitutes the outlet 58, etc.).
That is, an eleventh game ball guide member and a twelfth game ball guide member are provided to guide the game ball so that it does not enter the other openings (openings PH2 to PH9, etc.). In addition, the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member are configured to cover the front ends of the other openings (openings PH2 to PH9, etc.) so that the game ball does not contact the front ends of the other openings (openings PH2 to PH9, etc.). Furthermore, a predetermined gap is provided between the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member, through which the front ends of the other openings (openings PH2 to PH9, etc.) are exposed. And, the game ball is configured so that it cannot contact the front ends of the other openings (openings PH2 to PH9, etc.) through the predetermined gap.

In the above embodiment, the second opening according to the present invention is composed of the openings PH3 to PH6. That is, it has a 21st game ball guide member that guides the game ball to pass through the openings PH3 to PH6. The 21st game ball guide member covers the front ends of the openings PH3 to PH6 so that the game ball does not come into contact with a predetermined lower part of the front ends of the openings PH3 to PH6. Also, a predetermined upper part (non-covered part NC) of the front ends (peripheries) of the openings PH3 to PH6 is not covered by the 21st game ball guide member so that the game ball can come into contact with it.
However, the second opening of the present invention may also be composed of other openings (opening PH7 for placing the composite winning device 70, opening PH8 constituting the first starting opening 51, opening PH9 constituting the outlet 58, etc.).
That is, a 21st game ball guide member is provided to guide the game ball to pass through the other openings (openings PH7 to PH9). The 21st game ball guide member covers the front ends of the other openings (openings PH7 to PH9) so that the game ball does not come into contact with a predetermined lower part of the front ends of the other openings (openings PH7 to PH9). Also, a predetermined upper part (non-covered part NC) of the front ends (peripheries) of the other openings (openings PH7 to PH9) is not covered by the 21st game ball guide member so that the game ball can come into contact with it.

1 Pachinko machine 11 Game board 11a Substrate 11b Cell sheet 51 First start port 52 Second start port 55a to 55f Other winning ports 58 Out port 61 Fourth pattern display device 70 Composite winning device B1 Left structure B2 Right structure B3 Upper structure B4 Lower structure B5 Other winning port structure B6 Start port structure G1 to G4 Gaps PH1 to PH9 Openings

Claims (2)

A front frame having a design portion formed at the top,
A game ball guide member provided on the front surface of the game board ;
A play area including a left area and a right area formed on the front surface of the play board ;
A guide passage is disposed in the upper part of the game area and guides a game ball launched with a strong force from the left side area to the right side area .
The design portion protrudes forward from the front surface of the front frame,
The game board has an opening,
The guide passage has an outer circumferential surface and an inner circumferential surface, and extends in an arc shape.
The game ball guiding member includes a first game ball guiding member and a second game ball guiding member that guide the game ball,
The first game ball guiding member and the second game ball guiding member are arranged adjacent to each other along a peripheral portion of the opening, and cover the peripheral portion of the opening so that the game ball does not contact the peripheral portion of the opening,
A gap is provided between the first game ball guiding member and the second game ball guiding member,
The size of the gap is set so that the game ball cannot contact the peripheral portion of the opening through the gap,
Among the lines extending perpendicularly to the front surface of the game board , a line passing through the apex of the outer peripheral surface is set as a reference line;
Among the portions where a vertical line relative to the reference line can intersect, the rearmost portion on the underside of the design portion is defined as a first design portion;
When the lowermost part on the lower surface of the design part among the parts where a vertical line with respect to the reference line can intersect is defined as the second design part,
The first design portion is located below the reference line and is located at a distance from the reference line equal to or less than the diameter of a game ball,
The second design portion is located below the reference line and is at a distance from the reference line that is equal to or greater than the diameter of a gaming ball. A front frame having a design portion formed at the top,
A play area including a left area and a right area formed on a front surface of the play board ;
A guide passage is disposed in the upper portion of the game area and guides a game ball launched with a strong force from the left side area to the right side area ;
A launch control means for controlling the launch of the game ball in response to the rotation operation of the operation means,
The design portion protrudes forward from the front surface of the front frame,
The guide passage has an outer circumferential surface and an inner circumferential surface, and extends in an arc shape.
Among the lines extending perpendicularly to the front surface of the game board , a line passing through the apex of the outer peripheral surface is set as a reference line;
Among the portions where a vertical line relative to the reference line can intersect, the rearmost portion on the underside of the design portion is defined as a first design portion;
When the lowermost part on the lower surface of the design part among the parts where a vertical line with respect to the reference line can intersect is defined as the second design part,
The first design portion is located below the reference line and is located at a distance from the reference line equal to or less than the diameter of a game ball,
The second design portion is located below the reference line and is at a distance from the reference line equal to or greater than the diameter of a game ball,
The operating means is rotatable within a range from an initial position to a maximum position,
an operation torque required to start rotating the operation means from the initial position is defined as a first operation torque;
an operation torque required to rotate the operation means from the initial position to a predetermined reference position is defined as a second operation torque;
When an operation torque required to rotate the operating means from the initial position to the maximum position is defined as a third operation torque,
The second operating torque is greater than the first operating torque,
The third operating torque is greater than the second operating torque and is equal to or less than twice the second operating torque,
A gaming machine in which, when the operating means is rotated to the specified reference position, a gaming ball is launched toward the left side area, and, when the operating means is rotated to the maximum position, a gaming ball is launched toward the right side area.

Images